1999-03 Specs~~~~~~~~~~0®~~
~®~~
cutlet C~nte~-
~---- - -,
Albertville Minnesota
ncv~o~n~r:
JMJ PROPERTIES, Inc.
Real Estate Development ®Management Consulting
107 Sinclair Drive Muskegon, Michigan 49441
Phone (616) 798-4670 FAX :(616) 798-4611
PROJECT A.'~tl[lECI:
~~-TE ~OhI~BC~RATI~J~ N
C
(-~ 5~0 ~~das~~ ~d~a~u®
L~J ToD®do, ®C~ ~3~®~
Ph®~ae~ Q~1gD 2~2-7~®5
~~x~ (~~gD 2~2-7~~®
f1VILE~ERS:
NEEDHAM and ASSOCIATES JOHN OIiVER AND ASSOC,, ~~C,
CONSULTING ENGINEERS
8417 SANTA FE DR SUITE 200 2Ot W. TRAVELLERS TRAIL x200
OVERLAND PARK,. KA 66212 BURNSVILLE, MINNESOTA 5`337
(913)385-5300 fAX (913)385-0978 (612) 894-3045 fAX (6t2) 894-3049
~~o,~~rY No: ®~~~,
- 9Od~97 nA,~FiCI~ 1989
1
~I
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS P~
01000 General Requirements 01000-1 - 01000-3
01010 Summary of Work 01010-1 - 01010-3
01026 Unit Pricing 01026-1 - 01026-13
DIVISION 2 -SITE WORK
02751 Portland Cement Concrete Walks 02751-1 - 02751-2
DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE
03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-1 - 03300-19
03450 Precast Concrete -Plant Cast 03450-1 - 03450-13
DIVIS ION 5 -METALS
05120 Structural Steel 05120-1 - 05120-8
05220 Steel Joists and Joist Girders 05220-1 - 05220-4
05310 Steel Deck 05310-1 - 05310-4
05400 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05400-1 - 05400-4
05500 _
Metal Fabrications 05500-1 - 05500-11
DIVI SION 6 -WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100 Rough Carpentry 06100-1 - 06100-6
06200 Finish Carpentry 06200-1 - 06200-3
i DIVI SION 7 -THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07210 Building Insulation 07210-1 - 07210-5
07241 Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems -Class PB 07241-1 - 07241-9
' 07411 Metal Wall Panels 07411-1 - 07411-4
07412 Metal Roof Panels 07412-1 - 07412-9
07530 Single-Ply Membrane Roofing 07530-1 - 07530-6
07700 Roof Specialties and Accessories 07700-1 - 07700-3
07901 Joint Sealants 07901 -1 - 07901-11
DIVI SION 8 -DOOR AND WINDOWS
08111 Standard Steel Doors and Frames 08111-1 - 08111-7
08211 Flush Wood Doors 08211-1 - 08211-4
08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 08410-1 - 08410-10
' 08710 Door Hardware 08710-1 - 08710-12
08800 Glass and Glazing 08800-1 - 08800-8
.,. TABLE OF CONTENTS TC - 1
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
DIVISION - FINISHE
09250 Gypsum Drywall 09250-1 - 09250-9
09253 Gypsum Sheathing 09253-1 - 09253-3
09300 Tile 09300-1 - 09300-8
09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09511-1 - 09511-6
09650 Resilient Flooring 09650-1 - 09650-6
09900 Painting 09900-1 - 09900-11
DIVI SION 10 - PE IALTIE
10155 Toilet Compartments 10155-1 - 10155-5
10425 Signs _ 10425-1 - 10425-2
10550 Postal Specialties 10550-1 - 10550-3
10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories 10800-1 - 10800-4
DIVISION 15 - ME HANI AL
Mechanical Criteria 1 -32
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRI AL
Electrical Criteria 1 - 26
TABLE OF CONTENTS TC - 2
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 01000 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 INSTRUCTIONS TO CONTRACTOR
A. The SCOPE OF WORK is provided as minimum guidelines to provide the Owner and
Contractor with a basic understanding of what the Owner expects to be covered under the
contract. Without exception, all applicable building codes and requirements of many
State or local governing authorities shall take precedence over this scope of work and
shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. All construction shall meet the current applicable building and zoning, codes and
requirements, that are in place upon application of permit.
C. Contractor shall assume the responsibility of providing the Owner his requirements with
the best possible workmanship and material quality for the lowest possible cost.
D. All prices shall include all the work as described in this document and shall include all
labor, materials, equipment, .services, fees, and permits as necessary for the entire
completion of the project.
E. No allowances will be accepted, all prices represented will benot-to-exceed prices.
F. The Owner reserves the right to hold the proposals for a period of a s during which
time the Contractor may not withdraw their proposal.
G. Contractor to provide allowance of $2,000.00 to assemble and install Owner supplied site
furnishings.
1.2 INSURANCE
A. Workmen's Compensation
Employer's Liability
B. Comprehensive General Liability
Personal Injury
(Statutory by State)
$100,000/50,000/100,000
$1,000,000 Each Occurrence
$2,000,000 Aggregate
C. Automotive Liability $ Each Person
Bodily Injury $ Each Occurrence
Property Damage $ Each Occurrence
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01000-1
Combined Single Limit
OR
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
$1,000,000 Each Occurrence
D. Builders Risk Value of Total Contract Plus 10%
' E. Name the Owner as additional insured.
1.3 COORDINATION AND SUPERVISION
A. The contractor shall provide coordination and supervision of all trades, suppliers, utility
companies, Architect, and Engineers, tenants and/or their Contractors whether under
' contract by himself, Owner or others. Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling of
all work necessary for the completion of the project. Contractor shall act as the project
team leader in coordinating and communicating with all parties involved with the project.
1.4 DESIGN
A. Contractor shall be responsible for all documents necessary for the completion of the
project. Some documents may be provided by Owner, however, contractor shall be
responsible for their accuracy and completeness. All documents must be approved by
Owner prior to any work beginning. Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of any
changes in work when work begins prior to Owner's approval.
1 B. Contractor is to provide Owner with a complete set of reproducible drawings and
specifications at the start of the project, as documents are changed, and a complete set of
"AS BUILT" documents upon completion. All drawings furnished to Owner shall be
mylar, reproducible.
C. Contractor is to submit for approval all color samples, material samples, shop drawings,
brochures, and data on all proposed equipment, fixtures, and materials.
1.5 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION
A. Any temporary construction necessary for the completion or safety of any trade, shall be
the Contractor's responsibility. If, at any time, Contractor is performing work while the
public is on the premises, Contractor shall provide proper barricading and provide safe
' and adequate egress to all stores open for business.
B. Provide complete instructions to Owner's agent for all operating systems and the
maintenance thereof. This is to include, but not be limited to, HVAC, plumbing, fire
protection, electric lighting and distribution, and any special equipment furnished, etc.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01000-2
I~
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1.6 SCHEDULE
A. Contractor shall provide a complete project schedule including start dates, duration of
each phase of work, tenant turnover, and substantial completion. Update as often as
necessary or when change in schedule occurs.
B. Contractor to provide Owner with a complete schedule of all material order dates and
delivery dates.
1.7 UTILITY TURNOVER PROCEDURE
A. Contractor shall be responsible for having utility i.e., electric, gas, water, meters in place
and operable at the time of turnover.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for all installation and usage costs up until one of the
following:
1. Tenant occupies space for interior improvement.
2. Completion of punch list and Certificate of Occupancy.
3. Thirty (30) days after substantial completion of the entire project.
1.8 CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY
A. Contractor shall be responsible for providing Unconditional Certificate of Occupancy for
the entire structure, as well as each individual tenant space.
B. Contractor may be responsible for unfinished items holding up the Certificate of
Occupancy. However, Contractor shall coordinate and be responsible for providing final
Certificate of Occupancies.
END OF SECTION 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01000-3
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
1 ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1 SECTION 01010 - SLI~vIMARY OF WORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to this Section.
1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
' A. The Project consists of a new shopping center called Johnson Creek Factory Shoppes,
Phase 2, Johnson Creek, Wisconsin, as shown on Contract Documents prepared by The
' Collaborative Inc, Architects, and Interior Designers.
B. The Work consists of the construction of a 1-story retail shopping center including: site,
' architectural, mechanical, and electrical work.
' 1. Site development construction for the phase one of a single story retail strip
mall to include all earthwork, utility construction, drainage construction, pad
preparation for building structure, erosion and sediment control, and other
related construction.
2. The building construction includes all items shown on the drawings,
specifications, and includes such items as: Concrete, masonry walls, structural
steel, steel joists, metal roof deck, insulated membrane roofing, roof accessories,
sheet metal, interior partitions, doors and frames, aluminum entrances,
' hardware, glazing, interior finishes, plumbing, fire protection,
heating-ventilating-air conditioning, electrical systems and lighting.
1.3 THE PROJECT TEAM
' Owner/Developer
Jim Morse
Steve Smallbone
1 Shane Bullough
Bobby Morse
Architect
Dan Tabor
Nancy Kime
JMJ Properties, Inc
107 Sinclair Drive
Muskegon, Michigan 49441
Telephone: (616) 798-4670
Fax: (616) 798-4611
The Collaborative Inc
500 Madison Avenue
Toledo, Ohio 43604
Telephone: (419) 242-7405
Fax: (419) 242-7400
SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1
I~ ~
LJI
' 1.4
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
Structural Engineer Needham & Associates
Craig Archer 8417 Sante Fe Drive
Suite 200
Overland Park, KA 66212
Telephone: (913) 385-5300
Fax: (913) 385-5300
Civil Engineer John Oliver & Associates, Inc.
John Stigler 201 W. Travelers Trail #200
Burnsville, Minnesota 55337
Telephone: (612) 894-3045
Fax: (612) 894-3049
Mechanical, Plumbing, Design Build by General
Fire Protection, Electrical Contractor
CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. General: During the construction period the Contractor shall have full use of the
premises for construction operations, including use of the site. The Contractor's use of
the premises is limited only by the Owner's right to perform construction operations with
its own forces or to employ separate contractors on portions of the prof ect.
' 1. Confine operations to areas within Contract limits indicated. Portions of the site
beyond areas in which construction operations are indicated are not to be
disturbed.
1.5 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. A Certificate of Substantial Completion will be executed for each specific portion of
the Work to be occupied prior to Owner occupancy.
B. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from local building officials prior to Owner
occupancy.
C. Prior to partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully
operational. Required inspections and tests shall have been successfully completed.
Upon occupancy the Owner will provide operation and maintenance of mechanical
and electrical systems in occupied portions of the building.
SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 2
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
AI-BERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1.6 SOILS REPORT
A. A soils and Geotechnical report shall be supplied and completed by the Owner and shall
be considered part of the contract documents.
1.7 QUANTITIES
A. The work consists of the following breakdown of quantities:
1. Tenant Spaces - 52.
2. Tenant Restrooms - 52.
3. Common Area Bathrooms.
a. Room 106A Women's - 7 waterclosets, 4 sinks.
b. Room 104A Men's - 3 waterclosets, 3 urinal, 4 sinks.
c. Room 106B Women - 7 waterclosets, 4 sinks.
d. Room 104B Men - 3 waterclosets, 3 urinals, 4 sinks.
4. Janitor Rooms - 2 total.
5. Utility/Storage - 3 total.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not applicable).
PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not used).
END OF SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 3
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 01026 -UNIT PRICES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.
B. All Sections of this project specification relate to this section including Division 1:
1.3 DEFII~IITIONS
A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit
of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum
by appropriate modification, if the estimated quantities of Work required by the
Contract Documents are increased or decreased.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance,
overhead, profit, and applicable taxes.
B. The Owner reserves the right to reject the Contractor's measurement of work-in-place
that involves use of established unit prices, and to have this work measured, at the
Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to the Contractor.
C. Schedule: A "Unit Price Schedule" is included at the end of this Section. Specification
Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials described under
each unit price.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 UNIT PRICE SCHEDULE
CONCRETE:
1. Saw cut rear Tenant door 3' x 7'; during precast installation. $
1.1 Saw cut rear Tenant door 3' x 7'; after precast installation. $
UNIT PRICES 01026- 1
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
AI-BERTVILLE , MINNESOTA
2. Saw cut rear Tenant door 6° x 7°; during precast installation. $
2.1 Saw cut rear Tenant door 6° x 7°; after precast installation. $
3. Install 6' x 5' x 6" stoop at the rear Tenant door. ~
4. Cost per foot to saw cut, patch and remove a 6" wide trench for electrical conduit in the
slab $
on grade from 1' - 10'.
4.1 Cost per foot to saw cut, patch and remove a 6" wide trench for electrical conduit in the
slab $
on grade from 10' - 40' .
METALS
1. Furnish RTU Frame. $
2. Install RTU Frame; before roof deck. $
2.1 Install RTU Frame; after roof deck. $
CARPENTRY:
1. Insta113° x 7° rear door, frame, and hardware; while on site. $
1.1 Insta113° x 7° rear door, frame, and hardware; after leaving the site. $
2. Install 6° x 7° rear door, frame, and hardware; while on site. $
2.1 Install6° x 7° rear door, frame, and hardware; after leaving the site. $
3. Install interior Tenant door, and hardware; while on site. $
3.1 Install interior Tenant door, and hardware; after leaving the site. $
4. Install Tenant bath accessories; while on site. $
4.1 Install Tenant bath accessories; after leaving the site. $
5. Omit 3° x 7° rear door, frame, and hardware. $
6. Omit 6° x 7° rear door, frame, and hardware. $
6.1 Omit 6° x 7° rear door, frame, and hardware; after delivery. $
7. Omit interior Tenant door, frame, and hardware. $
7.1 Omit interior Tenant door, frame, and hardware; after delivery. $
8. Omit Tenant bath accessories. $
8.1 Omit Tenant bath accessories; after delivery. $
UNIT PRICES 01026- 2
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
9. Toilet accessories including; paper towel dispensers, grab bars, mirrors, toilet paper
holders, $
soap dispenser, and electric hand dryers.
ROOFING:
1. Saw cut new RTU opening and flash curb; before roofing is complete and still on site.
1.1 Saw cut new RTU opening and flash curb; after roofing is complete (including
remobilization). $
CAULKING:
1. Caulk rear Tenant door. - $
1.1 Caulk interior door. $
DOORS:
1. Add/deduct 3° x 7° rear exterior Tenant door, frame, and hardware; before delivery.
1.1 Add/deduct 3° x 7° rear exterior Tenant door, frame, and hardware; after delivery.
2. Add/deduct 3° x 7° interior door, frame, and hardware (based on building shell
standard). $
STOREFRONT:
1. Add/deduct double storefront entry doors and hardware; before installation. $
1.1 Add/deduct double storefront entry doors and hardware; after installation. $
2. Add/deduct single entry doors and hardware; before installation. $
2.1 Add/deduct single entry doors and hardware; after installation. $
3. Relocate existing double doors; after installation. $
DRYWALL:
1. Add/deduct Tenant demising wall (full height); while on site.
1.1 Add/deduct Tenant demising wall (full height); after leaving the site.
2. Add/deduct single Tenant rest room; while on site.
2.1 Add/deduct single Tenant rest room; after leaving the site.
3. Add/deduct stockroom wall to 10' 0" a.f.f.; while on site.
3.1 Add/deduct stockroom wall to 10' 0" a.f.f.; after leaving the site
UNIT PRICES
(per foot) $
(per foot) $
(per foot) $
(per foot) $
(per foot) $
(per foot) $
01026- 3
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
4. Add/deduct interior wall framing to 10' 0" a.f.f. (offices, fitting rooms, etc.);(per foot) $
while on site.
4.1 Add/deduct interior wall framing to 10' 0" a.f.f. (offices, fitting rooms, etc.);(per foot) $
after leaving the site.
5. Add/deduct interior wall framing to 12' 0" a.f.f. (offices, fitting rooms, etc.);(per foot) $
while on site.
5.1 Add/deduct interior wall framing to 12' 0" a.f.f. (offices, fitting rooms, etc.);(per foot) $
after leaving the site.
6. Install door frame;. while on site. (per foot) $
6.1 Install door frame; after leaving the site. (per foot) $
7. Omit door frame installation; while on site. (per foot) $
8. Cost per sq. ft. to finish, tape, and sand 10' 0" a.f.f. to deck; while on site.(per foot) $
8.1 Cost per sq. ft. to finish, tape, and sand 10' 0" a.f.f.; after leaving the site.(per foot) $
9. Fur-out and insulate back wall; while on site. $
9.1 Fur-out and insulate back wall; after leaving the site. $
DRYWALL; Continued:
10. Cost per sq. ft. for patching relocated electrical outlets and other miscellaneous holes
cut into $
finished drywall; after taping crews have left the site.
11. Cost per sq. ft. for patching relocated electrical outlets and other miscellaneous holes
cut into $
finished drywall; while taping crews are still on site.
12. Frame, drywall, and tape one (1) column 1' x 1' to 10' a.f.f.; while still on site. $
12.1 Frame, drywall, and tape one (1) column 1' x 1' to 10' a.f.f.; after leaving the site. $
13. One hour rated exit corridor; full height (per lineal foot); while on site. $
13.1 One hour rated exit corridor; full height (per lineal foot); after leaving the site. $
PAINTING:
1. Prime walls to deck; while on site. $
1.1 Prime walls to deck; after leaving the site. $
2. Prime walls to 10' a.f.f.; while on site. $
2.1 Prime walls to 10' a.f.f.; after leaving the site. $
UNIT PRICES 01026- 4
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
3. Paint interior door frame; while on site.
3.1 Paint interior door frame; after leaving the site.
4. Stain interior Tenant door; while on site.
4.1 Stain interior Tenant door; after leaving the site.
5. Paint rear Tenant door and frame; while on site.
5.1 Paint rear Tenant door and frame; after leaving the site.
6. Paint interior walls two (2) coats to 10' 0" a.f.f.; while on site.
6.1 Paint interior walls two (2) coats to 10' 0" a.f.f.; after leaving the site.
7. Paint interior walls two (2) coats to deck; while on site.
7.1 Paint interior walls two (2) coats to deck; after leaving the site.
CEILINGS:
1. Add/deduct acoustical ceilings; while on site.
1.1 Add/deduct acoustical ceilings; after leaving the site.
FLOORING:
1. Cost per sq. ft. to add/deduct resilient flooring (Building Std.) in a single tenant
restroom; $
while on site.
1.1 Cost per sq. ft. to add/deduct resilient flooring (Building Std.) in a single tenant
restroom; $
after leaving the site.
2. Cost per lin. ft. to add/deduct floor base per bath; while on site. $
2.1 Cost per lin. ft. to add/deduct floor base per bath; after leaving the site. $
MECHANICAL UNIT PRICES:
1. Furnish and install one (1) water closet including all services; before rough in is
complete. $
1.1 Furnish and install one (1) water closet including all services; after rough in is complete.
1.2 Omit one (1) water closet including all services; before rough in is complete. $
1.3 Omit one (1) water closet; after rough in is complete. $
2. Furnish and install one (1) wall hung lavatory; before rough in is complete. $
2.1 Furnish and install one (1) wall hung lavatory; after rough in is complete. $
2.2 Omit one (1) wall hung lavatory; during rough in. $
2.3 Omit one (1) wall hung lavatory; after rough in. $
UNIT PRICES 01026- 5
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
3. Furnish and install one (1) janitor's sink adjacent to a toilet room; before rough in is
complete. $
' 3.1 Furnish and install one (1) janitor's sink adjacent to a toilet room; after rough in is
complete. $
3.2 Omit one (1) janitor's sink adjacent to a toilet room; during rough in. $
' 3.3 Omit one (1) janitor's sink adjacent to a toilet room; after rough in. $
' 4. Furnish and install one (1) six gallon electric heater complete with hot water piping to
each $
lavatory(ies) within the Tenant space; before rough in is complete.
' 4.1 Furnish and install one (1) six gallon electric heater complete with hot water piping to
each $
lavatory(ies) within the Tenant space; after rough in is complete.
' 4.2 Omit one (1) six gallon electric heater complete with hot water piping to each
lavatory(ies) $
within the Tenant space; during rough in.
' 4.3 Omit one (1) six .gallon electric heater complete with hot water piping to each
lavatory(ies) $
within the Tenant space; after rough in.
5. Furnish and install one (1) handicapped electric water cooler including all services on a
$
toilet room wall; during rough in.
5.1 Furnish and install one (1) handicapped electric water cooler including all services on a
$
toilet room wall; after rough in.
5.2 Omit one (1) handicapped electric water cooler including all services on a toilet room
wall; $
during rough in.
' S.3 Omit one (1) handicapped electric water cooler including all services on a toilet room
wall; $
after rough in.
'
6. Provide lump-sum for each complete air conditioning zone serviced by 5, 7-1/2, and 10
nominal $
ton rooftop combination units, including all ductwork, piping and wiring. Provide one
(1)
ceiling supply air diffuser for each 300 square feet of interior zone; low bidder.
'
a 5 ton $
b) 7-1 /2 ton $
' c) 10 ton $
d) Per ton $
' " UNIT PRICES 01026- 6
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
~. Add/deduct to furnish and install 6", 8", 10", and 12" neck diffusers with damper and
15' of flexible ductwork.
Anticipate the installation of three or more diffusers at any one time; during rough in.
a) 6" neck diffuser (each)
$
b) 8" neck diffuser (each)
c) 10" neck diffuser (each)
d) 12" neck diffuser (each)
8. Ad d/deduct to furnish and install 6", 8", 10", and 12" neck diffusers with damper and
15' of flexible ductwork.
Anticipate the installation of three or more diffusers at any one time; after rough in.
' "
a) 6
neck diffuser (each)
' b) 8".neck diffuser (each)
c) 10" neck diffuser (each)
$
MECHANICAL UNIT PRICES: Continued:
9. Furnish and install erimeter air ceilin re isters includi
p g g ng ductwork from trunks.
Provide $
' a minimum of (1) register per 10 feet of perimeter zone (each); during rough in.
9.1 Furnish and install perimeter air ceiling registers including ductwork from trunks.
Provide $
a minimum of (1) register per 10 feet of perimeter zone (each); after rough in.
10. Omit perimeter air ceiling registers including ductwork from trunks. Provide' a
minimum of (1) $
register per 10 feet of perimeter zone (each); during rough in.
' 10.1 Omit perimeter air ceiling registers including ductwork from trunks. Provide a
minimum of (1) $
register per 10 feet of perimeter zone (each); after rough in.
' '
11. Furnish and install a crate return
lles on a er s uare foot asi • uri
gg gn p q b s, d ng rough m.
11.1 Furnish and install egg crate return grilles on a per square foot basis; after rough in. $
$
11.2 .
Omit egg crate return grilles on a per square foot basis; during rough in.
$
' 11.3 Omit egg crate return grilles on a per square foot basis; after rough in. $
' UNIT PRICES 01026- 7
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
12.1 Furnish and install acoustically lined transfer ducts; during rough in. $
12.2 Furnish and install acoustically lined transfer ducts; after rough in. $
12.3 Omit acoustically lined transfer ducts; during rough in. $
12.4 Omit acoustically lined transfer ducts; after rough in. $
13. Furnish and install one (1) ceiling exhaust unit, ductwork, and terminal devices to
exhaust $
one (12)40 sq. ft. toilet room; during rough in.
13.1 Furnish and install one (1) ceiling exhaust unit, ductwork, and terminal devices to
exhaust one $
(12) 40 sq. ft. toilet room; after rough in.
13.2 Omit one (1) ceiling exhaust unit, ductwork, end terminal devices to exhaust one (12)
40 sq. ft. $
toilet room; during rough in.
13.3 Furnish and install one (1) ceiling exhaust unit, ductwork, and terminal devices to
exhaust one $
(12) 40 sq. ft. toilet room; after rough in.
SPRINKLER:
1. Furnish and install one (1) chrome sprinkler head to ceiling height; during rough in.$
1.2 Furnish and install one (1) chrome sprinkler head to ceiling height; after ceilings are in
place. $
2. Relocate one (1) chrome sprinkler head at finished ceiling height; during rough in. $
2.1 Relocate one (1) chrome sprinkler head at finished ceiling height; after ceilings are in
' place. $
3. Furnish and install one (1) brass sprinkler head to existing system; during rough in. $
3.1 Furnish and install one (1) brass sprinkler head to existing system; after ceilings are in
place. $
4. Relocate one (1) brass sprinkler head; during rough in. $ '~
4.1 Relocate one (1) brass sprinkler head; after rough in. $
5. Open ceilings (spiral main trunk):
a) Furnish and install surface mounted grille. $
b) Furnish and install spiral mounted grille with square lay-in diffuser. $
c) Furnish and install spiral mounted grille with round lay-in diffuser. $
I' UNIT PRICES 01026- 8
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
ELECTRICAL UNIT PRICES:
1 1. Furnish and install one (1) of each type of light fixture listed in the lighting fixture
schedule; during rough in:
Fixture Type A 2x4 3-lamp energy saving (Tenant) troffer (each) $
' Fixture Type B 2x4 3-LAMP ELECTRONIC (Public) TROFFER (each) $
Fixture Type C INDUSTRIAL STRIP 1-LAMP (TENANT toilet) (each) $
Fixture Type D
Fixture Type E STRIP FIXTURE 2-LAMP EB (each)
100W MH CANOPY LIGHT (each) $
$
Fixture Type F 150W HPS WALL PACK (each) $
Fixture Type G 100W MH FLOOD LIGHT (each) $
' Fixture Type H 3-HEAD 1000 WMH SITE POLE WBASE (each) $
Fixture Type I 2x4 4-lamp energy saving (Tenant) troffer (each) $
Fixture Type J 1-HEAD 1000 WMH SITE POLE WBASE (each) $
' Fixture Type L BEGA WALL SCONCE $
Fixture Type M BATH FAN (each) $
Fixture Type EBU EMERGENCY BATTERY UNIT (each) $
Fixture Type X EXIT LIGHT -BATTERY BACKUP (each) $
2. Furnish and install one (1) of each type of light fixture listed in the lighting fixture
schedule; after rough in:
Fixture Type A 2x4 3-lamp energy saving (Tenant) troffer (each) $
1 Fixture Type B 2x4 3-LAMP ELECTRONIC (Public) TROFFER (each) $
Fixture Type C INDUSTRIAL STRIP 1-LAMP (TENANT toilet) (each) $
Fixture Type D
Fixture Type E STRIP FIXTURE 2-LAMP EB (each)
100W MH CANOPY LIGHT (each) $
$
Fixture Type F 150W HPS WALL PACK (each) $
Fixture Type G 100W MH FLOOD LIGHT (each) $
Fixture Type H 3-HEAD 1000 WMH SITE POLE WBASE (each) $
Fixture Type I 2x4 4-lamp energy saving (Tenant) troffer (each) $
Fixture Type J 1-HEAD 1000 WMH SITE POLE WBASE (each) $
Fixture Type L BEGA WALL SCONCE $
Fixture Type M BATH FAN (each) $
Fixture Type EBU EMERGENCY BATTERY UNIT (each) $
Fixture Type X EXIT LIGHT -BATTERY BACKUP (each) $
3. Omit one (1) of each type of light fixture listed in the lighting fixture schedule; before
rough in:
Fixture Type A
Fixture Type B
Fixture Type C
Fixture Type D
Fixture Type E
Fixture Type F
Fixture Type G
2x4 3-lamp energy saving (Tenant) troffer (each) $
2x4 3-LAMP ELECTRONIC (Public) TROFFER (each) $
INDUSTRIAL STRIP 1-LAMP (TENANT toilet) (each) $
STRIP FIXTURE 2-LAMP EB (each) $
100W MH CANOPY LIGHT (each) $
150W HPS WALL PACK (each) $
100W MH FLOOD LIGHT (each) $
' UNIT PRICES 01026- 9
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
Fixture Type H 3-HEAD 1000 WMH SITE POLE WBASE (each) $
Fixture Type I 2x4 4-lamp energy saving (Tenant) troffer (each) $
Fixture Type J 1-HEAD 1000 WMH SITE POLE WBASE (each) $
Fixture Type L BEGA WALL SCONCE $
Fixture Type M BATH FAN (each) $
Fixture Type EBU .EMERGENCY BATTERY UNIT (each) $
Fixture Type X EXIT LIGHT -BATTERY BACKUP (each) $
4. Omit one (1) of each type of light fixture listed in the lighting fixture schedule; after
rough in:
Fixture Type A 2x4 3-lamp energy saving (Tenant) troffer (each) $
Fixture Type B 2x4 3-LAMP ELECTRONIC (Public) TROFFER (each) $
Fixture Type C INDUSTRIAL STRIP 1-LAMP (TENANT toilet) (each) $
Fixture Type D STRIP FIXTURE 2-LAMP EB (each) $
Fixture Type E 100W MH CANOPY LIGHT (each) $
Fixture Type F 150W HPS WALL PACK (each) $
Fixture Type G 100W MH FLOOD LIGHT (each) $
Fixture Type H 3-HEAD 1000 WMH SITE POLE WBASE (each) $
Fixture Type I 2x4 4-lamp energy saving (Tenant) troffer {each) $
Fixture Type J 1-HEAD 1000 WMH SITE POLE WBASE (each) $
Fixture Type L BEGA WALL SCONCE $
Fixture Type M BATH FAN (each) $
Fixture Type EBU EMERGENCY BATTERY UNIT (each) $
Fixture Type X EXIT LIGHT -BATTERY BACKUP (each) $
UNIT PRICES 01026- 10
it
PHASE I
' MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
ELECTRICAL UNIT PRICES; Continued:
S. Furnish and install one (1) general use wall duplex receptacle in demising walls
' complete $
(nomina1200 watts); during rough in. Note: Location of Tenant wall will vary.
' S.1 Furnish and install one (1) general use wall duplex receptacle in demising walls
.complete $
(nominal 200 watts); after rough in. Note: Location of Tenant wall will vary.
' S.2 Omit (1) general use wall duplex receptacle in demising walls complete (nomina1200
watts); $
before rough in. Note: Location of Tenant wall will vary.
5.3 Omit one (1) general use wall duplex receptacle in demising walls complete (nominal
200 watts); $
after rough in. Note: Location of Tenant wall will vary.
6. Furnish and install one (1) general use wall duplex receptacle in Tenant walls complete
(nomina1200 watts); during rough in.
$
6.1 Furnish and install one (1) general use wall duplex receptacle in Tenant walls complete
$
(nomina1200 watts); after rough in.
6.2 Omit (1) general use wall duplex receptacle in Tenant walls complete (nominal 200
watts); $
before rough in.
6.3 Omit one (1) general use wall duplex receptacle in Tenant walls complete (nominal 200
1 watts); $
after rough in.
7. Furnish and install one (1) special use wall isolated ground duplex receptacle complete
7.1 (normal 1500 watts); demising walls.
Furnish and install one (1) special use wall isolated ground duplex receptacle complete
1 (nominal 1500 watts); demising walls.
7.2 Omit one (1) special use wall isolated ground duplex receptacle complete (nominal
1500 watts); $
' demising walls.
7.3 Omit one (1) special use wall isolated ground duplex receptacle complete (nominal
1500 watts); $
demising walls.
i~
UNIT PRICES
01026 - 11
i~
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
8. Furnish and install one (1) special use wall isolated ground duplex receptacle complete
(nominal 1500 watts); in Tenant walls locations to be determined by the Tenant.
8.1 Furnish and install one (1) special use wall isolated ground duplex receptacle complete
(nominal 1500 watts); in Tenant wall locations to be determined by the Tenant.
9. Furnish and install one (1), two compartment, power pole with two duplex receptacles;
$
before ceilings.
9.1 Furnish and install one (1), two compartment, power pole with two duplex receptacles;
$
after ceilings.
10. Furnish and install one (1) exit light during rough in; $
10.1 Furnish and install one (1) exit light after rough in. $
10.2
10.3 Furnish and install one (1) exit light after rough in with ceilings in place;
Omit one (1) exit light during rough in. $
$
10.4 Omit one (1) exit light after rough in. _ $
r
11. Furnish and install one (1) emergency light; during rough in. $
11.1 Furnish and install one (1) emergency light; after rough in. $
' 11.2 Furnish and install one (1) emergency light; after rough in with ceilings in place. $
11.3 Omit one (1) emergency light; during rough in. $
11.4 Omit one (1) emergency light; after rough in. $
12. Furnish and install a 400amp service in lieu of a 200amp service; before rough in.
Service Add $
' 12.1 400amp lateral. Add (per foot) $
12.2 Furnish and install a 400amp service in lieu of a 200amp service after rough in.Service
12
3 Add $
400am
lateral
f
t
Add
$
. p
.
(per
oo
)
ELECTRICAL UNIT PRICES: Continued:
13. Furnish and install 100 foot candles of lighting in sales area in lieu of 70 foot candles
(per square foot); before rough in.
$
13.1 Furnish and install 100 foot candles of lighting in sales area in lieu of 70 foot candles
$
(per square foot); after rough in.
UNIT PRICES
01026 - 12
II
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
14. Omit a 400amp service; before rough in.
14.1 Omit a 400amp service; after rough in.
14.2 Omit a 200amp service; before rough in.
14.3 Omit a 200amp service; after rough in.
15. .Furnish and install underground conduit (including trenching and backfill) per lineal
foot for the following sizes;
during rough in:
a) 3/4 "conduit $
b) 1-1.4" conduit $
c) 2" conduit $
d) 3" conduit $
e) 4" conduit $
16. Furnish and install underground conduit (including trenching and backfill) per lineal
foot for the following sizes;
after rough in; excluding saw cutting any concrete:
a) 3/4" conduit $
b) 1-1 /4" conduit $
c) 2" conduit $
d) 3" conduit $
e) 5" conduit $
CLARIFICATION
1. Unit prices do not include cutting and patching of concrete.
SPECIALTIES:
2. Furnish Tenant toilet accessories per single tenant bath; as specified under Section
10800. $
END OF SECTION 01026
UNIT PRICES 01026 - 13
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 02751 -PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE WALKS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit product data design mixes for concrete and laboratory test reports.
B. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete."
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Deformed Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 (ASTM A615M, Grade 420).
B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, flat sheets, not rolls.
C. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
D. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494. Calcium chloride shall not be used.
E. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, clear, Type I, Class B,
waterborne.
F. Tinted Imprinted Concrete System: Bomanite Corporation, P.O. Box 599, Madera,
California 93639, Telephone (209) 673-2411, Fax (209) 673-8246.
G. Color Hardener: Bomanite standard products for intended use.
2.1 MIXES
A. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixes to provide the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.
2. Slump Limit: 3 inches (75 mm) at point of placement.
3. W/C Ratio: 0.45 maximum at point of placement.
4. Air Content: 5.5 to 7.0 percent.
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE WALKS 02751 - 1
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 WALKS
A. Accurately position and support reinforcement, and secure against displacement.
B. Locate and install contraction, construction, isolation, and expansion joints as indicated
or required.
C. Place concrete in a continuous operation within planned joints or sections. Do not add
water to adjust slump.
D. Float surfaces to true planes within a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 10 feet (1:480) and
medium-to-fine-textured broom finish.
E. Tool edges and joints to a radius of 1/4 inch (6 mm).
F. Bomanite Color Hardener shall be applied evenly to the plastic surface by the dry-
shake method using a minimum of 60 pounds per 100 square feet. It shall be applied in
two or more shakes, floated after each and troweled only after the final floating.
G. Begin curing after finishing concrete. Keep concrete continuously moist for at least 7
days or apply membrane-forming curing compound to concrete. While the concrete is
still in the plastic stage of set, the BOMANITE imprinting tools shall be applied to
make the desired impression to the surface.
H. Owner will employ a testing agency to sample concrete, perform tests, and submit test
reports during concrete placement.
I. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective. Exclude
traffic from paving for at least 14 days.
END OF SECTION 02751
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE WALKS
02751 - 2
C
i~
~~
!~
u
II
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 03300 -CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix
design, placement procedures, and finishes.
B. This Section includes footings, piers, walls, slab on grade, canopy sidewalks, stairs,
and light pole bases.
C. This Section includes furnishings of all reinforcing layout, installation of anchor bolts,
grouting of base plates, furnishing and installing vapor barrier, installation of pipe
bollards and flagpole base.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming
accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing
compounds, dry-shake finish materials, and others as requested by Architect.
C. Shop drawings for reinforcement, prepared by registered Professional Engineer for
fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI
SP-66 (88), "ACI Detailing Manual," showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams
of bent bars, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special
reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures.
D. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test.
II
II
II
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications, and
standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."
2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), "Manual of Standard Practice."
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1
FORM MATERIALS
A. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable
material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit.
B. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form
ties, designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling concrete upon
removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to exposed
surface.
2.2
REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel.
C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.
D. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing,
supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use
wire-bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications.
1. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where
base material will not support chair legs.
2.3
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
1. Use one brand of cement throughout project unless otherwise acceptable to
Architect.
B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C or Type F.
C. .Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as herein specified. Provide aggregates
from a single source for exposed concrete.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1. For exterior exposed surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing
spalling-causing deleterious substances.
2. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 but that special tests or actual
service have shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may
be used when acceptable to Architect.
D. Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C 330.
E. Water: Drinkable.
F. Admixtures, General: Provide admixtures for concrete that contain not more than 0.1
percent chloride ions.
G. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible
with other required admixtures.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. "Air-Tite," Cormix.
b. "Air-Mix" or "Perma-Air," Euclid Chemical Co.
c. "Darex AEA" or "Daravair," W.R. Grace & Co.
d. "MB-VR" or "Micro-Air," Master Builders, Inc.
e. "Sealtight AEA," W.R. Meadows, Inc.
f. "Sika AER," Sika Corp.
H. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. "Chemtard," ChemMasters Corp.
b. "PSI N," Cormix.
c. "Eucon WR-75," Euclid Chemical Co.
d. "WRDA," W.R. Grace & Co.
e. "Pozzolith Normal" or "Polyheed," Master Builders, Inc.
f. "Prokrete-N," Prokrete Industries.
g. "Plastocrete 161," Sika Corp.
I. (Alternate for Interior Slabs)
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1. Fibrous Reinforcement: Engineered polypropylene fibers designed for
secondary reinforcement of concrete slabs.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1) "Fiberstrand 100," Euclid Chemical Co.
2) "Fibermesh," Fibermesh, Inc.
3) "Forta CR," Forta Corp.
4) "Grace Fibers," W.R. Grace & Co.
RELATED MATERIALS
A. Granular Base: Evenly graded mixture of fine and coarse aggregates to provide, when
compacted, a smooth and even surface below slabs on grade, as recommended in the
soils report.
B. Sand Cushion: Clean, manufactured or natural sand, as recommended in the soils
report.
C. Vapor Retarder: Provide vapor retarder cover under prepared base material where
indicated below slabs on grade. Use only materials that are resistant to deterioration
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows:
1. Polyethylene sheet not less than 6 mils thick.
2.5
PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial
batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. If trial batch method used,
use an independent testing facility acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting
proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field
quality control testing.
1. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 25 percent of cement content by weight.
B. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at
least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed
mix designs have been reviewed by Architect.
C. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as
indicated on drawings and schedules:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1. 4000-psi, 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.44 maximum
(non-air-entrained), 0.35 maximum (air-entrained).
2. 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.58 maximum
(non-air-entrained), 0.46 maximum (air-entrained).
D. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by
Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or
other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised
mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before
using in work.
2.6 ADMIXTURES
A. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture
(Superplasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability.
B. Use nonchloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient
temperatures below 50 deg F (10 deg C).
C. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated.
Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at
point of placement having total air content with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2
percent within following limits:
1. Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing, deicer
chemicals, or hydraulic pressure:
a. 4.5 percent (moderate exposure); 5.5 percent (severe exposure) 1-1/2-inch
max. aggregate.
b. 4.5 percent (moderate exposure); 6.0 percent (severe exposure) 1-inch
max. aggregate.
c. 5.0 percent (moderate exposure); 6.0 percent (severe exposure) 3/4-inch
max. aggregate.
d. 5.5 percent (moderate exposure); 7.0 percent (severe exposure) 1/2-inch
max. aggregate.
2. Other concrete (not exposed to freezing, thawing, or hydraulic pressure) or to
receive a surface hardener: 2 percent to 4 percent air.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 5
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' D. Use admixtures for water reduction and set control in strict compliance with
manufacturer's directions.
' E. Water-Cementitious Ratio: Provide concrete for following conditions with maximum
water-Cementitious (W/C) ratios as follows:
' 1. Subjected to freezing and thawing; W/C 0.45.
2. Subjected to deicers/watertight; W/C 0.40.
3. Subjected to brackish water, salt spray, or deicers; W/C 0.40.
'
F. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixe$ to result in concrete slump at point of
plac ement as follows:
'
1. Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3 inches.
' 2. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 3
inches.
' 3. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (Superplasticizer): Not more than 8
inches after addition of HRWR to site-verified 2-inch to 3-inch slump concrete.
4. Other concrete: Not more than 4 inches.
' 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Job-Site Mixing: Mix materials for concrete in appropriate drum-type batch machine
mixer. For mixers of one cu. yd. or smaller capacity, continue mixing at least 1-1/2
minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of
batch is released. For mixers of capacity larger than one cu. yd., increase minimum
' 1-1/2 minutes of mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional cu. yd. or fraction
thereof.
' B. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in work, indicating project
identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of
' water introduced.
C. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified.
1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C),
reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air
' temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to
60 minutes.
I , CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 6
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and vapor retarders with placement of
forms and reinforcing steel.
' 3.2 FORMS
' A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical and
lateral, static and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can
support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of
correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork
construction tolerances complying with ACI 347.
' B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate
alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for
' openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets,
chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features
required in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt
' joints and provide backup at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste.
C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete
' surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast
concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to
place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways,
reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
D. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for clean-
out, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely
brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
E. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber
chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.
F. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate
' work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases
from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built
into forms.
G. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive
concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete is
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 7
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' placed. Retighten forms and bracing before concrete placement as required to prevent
mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
' 3.3 VAPOR RETARDER/BARRIER INSTALLATION
A. General: Following leveling and tamping of granular base for slabs on grade, place
' vapor retarder/barrier sheeting with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.
B. Lap joints 6 inches and seal vapor barrier joints with manufacturers' recommended
' mastic and pressure-sensitive tape.
C. After placement of vapor retarder/barrier, cover with sand cushion and compact to
' depth as shown on drawings.
' 3.4 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice
for "Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement
and supports and as herein specified.
' 1. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder during reinforcement placement
and concreting operations.
' B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that
reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate
and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as
approved by Architect.
' D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum covera es for concrete rotection.
g p
' Arrange, space, and securely tie. bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in
position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into
concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
i E. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at
least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to
' prevent continuous laps in either direction.
0
0
' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 8
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' 3.5 JOINTS
A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated or, if not
indicated, locate so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as
acceptable to Architect.
' B. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints in walls and slabs
and between walls and footings. Accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may
be used for slabs.
J
f'
7
C. Place construction joints perpendicular . to main reinforcement. Continue
reinforcement across construction joints except as otherwise indicated. Do not
continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements.
D. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh
concrete.
E. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs-on-ground at
points of contact between slabs-on-ground and vertical surfaces, such as column
pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Joint filler and sealant materials are specified in Division 7 Sections of these
specifications.
F. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Construct contraction joints in
slabs-on-ground to form panels of patterns as shown. Use saw cuts 1/8 inch wide by
1/4 slab depth or inserts 1/4 inch wide by 1/4 of slab depth, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Form contraction joints by inserting premolded plastic, hardboard, or fiberboard
strip into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with slab surface. Tool
slab edges round on each side of insert. After concrete has cured, remove
inserts and clean groove of loose debris.
2. Contraction joints in unexposed floor slabs may be formed by saw cuts as soon
as possible after slab finishing as may be safely done without dislodging
aggregate.
3. If joint pattern not shown, provide joints not exceeding 15 feet in either
direction and located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at column
centerlines, half bays, third bays).
4. Joint sealant material is specified in Division 7 Sections of these specifications.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 9
PHASE I
' MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
3.6 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items
required. for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use
setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items
to be attached thereto.
B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to
obtain required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units
to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
3.7 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES
A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an a roved nonresidual low-VOC
pp ,
form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed.
B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into
contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed.
Apply incompliance with manufacturer's instructions.
' C. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust-preventative material. Rust-stained steel
formwork is not acceptable.
3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation,
1 reinforcing steel, .and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other crafts to permit
installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work.
B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing,
Transporting, and Placing Concrete," and as herein specified.
' C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be
placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or
planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction
joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location.
D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper
than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement
consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid
cold joints.
' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 10
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented
by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for
consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309.
' 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw
vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible
effectiveness of machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and
at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers
of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion limit duration of vibration
' to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of
reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix.
' E. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous
operation, within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is
completed.
1. Consolidate concrete dunng placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly
' worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike off. Use bull
floats or darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb
' slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.
3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement.
F. Cold-Weather Placing: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect
concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost,
freezing actions, or low temperatures.
G. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C),
' uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture
temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg
' C) at point of placement.
1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place
concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze
agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
H. Hot-Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair
quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as
herein specified.
1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 11
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of
placement below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled, or
chopped ice may be used to control temperature provided water equivalent of
ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Use of liquid nitrogen to cool
concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that
steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately
before embedment in concrete.
' 3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and.subgrade just before concrete is placed.
r 4. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures,
low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, when acceptable to Architect.
3.9 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES
' A. Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finish
work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture
imparted by form-facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and
' patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or
chipped off.
B. Smooth Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed to view or to be covered
with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied
directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or
other similar system. This is an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected
form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum
of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other projections completely
' removed and smoothed.
' 3.10 MONOLITHIC SLAB FIhtISHES
A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and
other finishes as hereinafter specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or
elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo; and as
otherwise indicated.
' 1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface-
. until ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only,
' when surface water has disappeared, when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to
permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with
power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power
' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 12
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
units. Check and level surface plane to tolerances of Ff 20 - Fl 17. Cut down
high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately
after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
B. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed to view
and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile,
paint, or other thin film finish coating system.
1. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using apower-driven trowel.
' Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved
over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation,
free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with surface
leveled to tolerances of Ff 20 - Fl 17. Grind smooth surface defects that would
telegraph through applied floor covering system.
' C. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms,
steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming
with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate
' required final finish with Architect before application.
3.11 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
' A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or
.hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture
loss before and during finishing operations with anevaporation-control material.
Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating,
but before power floating and troweling.
B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after
placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7
days.
' C. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by curing and sealing compound, by
moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing, and by combinations thereof, as
herein specified.
D. Provide moisture curing by following methods.
1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.
2. Use continuous water-fog spray.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 13
u
n
1
L
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
3. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate
cover with water, and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide
coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4-inch lap over adjacent
absorptive covers.
E. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows:
1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete,
placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches
and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or
tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
F. Provide curing and sealing compound to exposed interior slabs and to exterior slabs,
walks, and curbs as follows:
1. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final
finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen
has disappeared). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or
roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to
heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial- application. Maintain continuity of
coating and repair damage during curing period.
2. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered
with finish materials applied directly to concrete.
G. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of
beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place
for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue
curing by methods specified above, as applicable.
H. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and
other flat surfaces, by application of appropriate curing method.
I. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of
moisture-retaining cover, unless otherwise directed.
3.12 SHORES AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Comply with ACI 347 for shoring and reshoring in multistory construction,
and as herein specified.
B. Extend shoring from ground to roof for structures 4 stories or less, unless otherwise
permitted.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 14
1
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' C. Remove shores and reshore in a planned sequence to avoid damage to partially cured
concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support work without excessive
stress or deflection.
' D. Keep reshores in place a minimum of 15 days after placing upper tier, and longer if
required, until concrete has attained its required 28-day strength and heavy loads due
' to construction operations have been removed.
3.13 REMOVAL OF FORMS
'
A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls,
columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at
r not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided
concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and
B. provided curing and protection operations are maintained.
Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other
structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has
attained at least 75 percent of design minimum compressive strength at 28 days.
Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured
specimens representative of concrete location or members.
C. Form-facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other
vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form-facing material
without loosening or disturbing shores and supports.
3.14 REUSE OF FORMS
A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces.
' Apply new form-coating compound as specified for new formwork.
i B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean
surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure
joint to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces
' except as acceptable to Architect.
3.15 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
' A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by
other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place.
Mix, place, and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction.
Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work.
' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 15
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is
still green and steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners,
intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
' C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and
foundations, as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to
template at correct elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of
manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
D. Reinforced Masonry: Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry lintels and bond
beams where indicated on drawings and as scheduled. Maintain accurate location of
reinforcing steel during concrete placement.
3.16 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
' A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar
immediately after removal of forms, when acceptable to Architect.
' 1. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and
holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth
of less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface.
Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched
with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding compound
' has dried.
2. For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard
' portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color
surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and
color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and
' strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
B. Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces. if
defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects, as such,
include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spans, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock
' pockets, fins and other projections on surface, and stains and other discolorations that
cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry-pack mortar, or
precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that
affect the durability of concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and
1 replace concrete.
'I
' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 16
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for
' smoothness and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish.
Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to
drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having required slope.
1. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects that affect durability of
concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01
inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through
nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts, honeycomb, rock
pockets, and other objectionable conditions.
2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at
' least 14 days.
3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completion
of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with
patching compound. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
' Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to
Architect.
' 4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1
inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove
defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing
steel with at least 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in
contact with patching concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix patching
concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original
' concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.
Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
' D. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1 inch in diameter by
dry-pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean
of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding
' compound. Mix dry-pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine
aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for
' handling and placing. Place dry-pack before bonding compound has dried. Compact
dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area
continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure,
using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar.
' F. Repair methods not specified above maybe used, subject to acceptance of Architect.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 17
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' 3.17 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. General: The Owner will employ a testing laboratory to perform tests and to submit
' test reports.
B. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete may include the
following, as directed by Architect.
C. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with
' ASTM C 94.
1. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each
type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have
changed.
' 2. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal
weight concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure method for normal weight concrete; one
for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.
3. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when_air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C)
' and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and each time a set of
compression test specimens is made.
' 4. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for
each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store
cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cure test
specimens are required.
5. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour
' exceeding 5 cu. yds. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yds. more than the first
25 cu. yds. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at
' 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve
for later testing if required.
' 6. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given
class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or
from each batch if fewer than 5 are used.
' 7. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds.,
Architect may waive strength test if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is
' provided.
II~
' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 18
0
u
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' 8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion
laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective
procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.
' 9. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of
three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive
strength, and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive
strength by more than 500 psi.
' D. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, Ready-Mix
Producer, and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength
tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete
placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of
concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix
proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both
' 7-day tests and 28-day tests.
' E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device
ermitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection
ma
be
.
y
p
F. Additional Tests:. The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete
' when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have
not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing service may
' conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with
ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests when
unacceptable concrete is verified.
' END OF SECTION 03300
0
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 19
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 03450 -PRECAST CONCRETE -PLANT CAST
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes precast, prestressed structural concrete construction, including
product design not shown on contract drawings, manufacture, transportation, erection
and other related items such as anchorage, bearing pads, storage and protection of
precast concrete.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Cast-in Place Concrete: Section 03300.
2. Unit Masonry: Section 04200.
3. Structural Steel: Section 05120.
4. Flashing and Sheet Metal: Section 07600.
5. Joint Sealants: Section 07901.
6. Painting: Section 09900.
7. Receivers or Reglets for Flashing: Section 07600.
8. Building Insulation: Section 07210.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and install architectural precast concrete
units to withstand design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who utilizes a qualified professional
engineer to prepare design calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data for
architectural precast concrete units.
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE -PLANT CAST 03450 - 1
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data and instructions for manufactured materials and products.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Plans and/or elevations locating and defining all material furnished by
manufacturer (includes openings, finishes, type of insulation).
2. Sections and details showing connections, cast-in items and their relation to the
structure.
3. Description of all loose, cast-in and field hardware.
4. Field installed anchor location drawings.
5. All dead, live and other applicable loads used in the design.
D. Product Design Criteria:
1. Loading for Design:
A. Initial handling and erection stresses.
B. All dead and live loads as specified on the contract drawings.
C. All other loads specified for member, where applicable.
2. Design calculations of products not completed on the contract drawings shall be
performed by a registered engineer in precast, prestressed concrete design and
submitted for approval upon request.
3. Design shall be in accordance with applicable code, ACI 318.
E. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance
with requirements of the following based on comprehensive testing of current materials:
1. Concrete materials.
2. Reinforcing materials.
3. Prestressing strands.
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE -.PLANT CAST 03450 - 2
4. Admixtures.
5. Bearing pads.
6. Water-absorption test reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed
architectural precast concrete work similar in material, design, and extent to that
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
1 B. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm_expe~ienced in producing architectural precast
concrete units similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful
in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required
units without delaying the Work.
-.
1. Fabricator must participate in the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute's (PCI)
Plant Certification Program and be designated a PCI Certified Plant for Group Al
-Architectural Concrete.
2. Fabricator shall be registered and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
u
r
C~
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for approval, an independent testing agency
must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted
criteria conforming to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329, that it has the experience and
capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work.
D. PCI Design Standard: Comply with recommendations of PCPs MNL-120 "PCI Design
Handbook--Precast and Prestressed Concrete" applicable to types of architectural
precast concrete units indicated.
E. PCI Quality-Control Standard: Comply with requirements of PCPs MNL-117 "Manual
for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete
Products," including manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality-control
recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required.
F. ACI Publications: Comply with applicable provisions of the following ACI
publications:
1. ACI 318 (ACI 318M) "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."
G. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural
Welding Code--Steel" and AWS D1.4 "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE -.PLANT CAST 03450 - 3
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
H. .Field samples, approximately 36 by 48 inches (900 by 1200 mm), of architectural
precast concrete; in sets of 3 for each finish, color, and texture required, demonstrating
the range of variations expected in these characteristics.
1. In presence of Architect, damage part of an exposed-face surface and demonstrate
materials and methods proposed for repair of surface blemishes.
I. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: All local codes plus the following specifcations,
standard and codes are a part of these specifications.
1. ACI 318 -Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
2. AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code -Steel.
3. AWS D1.4 -Structural Welding Code -Reinforcing Steel.
4. ASTM Specifications - As referred to in Part 2, Products, of this specification.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver precast concrete units to Project site in such quantities and at such times to
ensure continuity of installation. Store units at Project site to prevent cracking,
distorting, warping, staining, or other physical damage, and so that markings are visible.
B. Lift and support units only at designated lifting or supporting points shown on Shop
Drawings.
1.7 SEQUENCING
1. Supply anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction
without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and
directions, as required, for installation.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATORS
A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Fabcon Incorporated, Savage, Minn.
2. Architect and Owner approved equal.
B. Portlant Cement:
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE -PLANT CAST 03450 - 4
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1. ASTM C150 - Type I or III.
C. Admixtures:
1. Air-entraining admixtures: ASTM C260.
2. Water reducing, retarding, accelerating, high-range water reducing admixtures:
ASTM C494.
3. Fly ash as required by manufacturer.
D. Aggregates:
1. ASTM C33 or C330.
E. Water:
1. Potable and free from foreign materials in amounts harmful to concrete and
embedded steel.
F. Reinforcing Steel:
1. Bars:
a. Deformed Billet Steel: ASTM A615.
b. Deformed Rail Steel: ASTM A616.
c. Deformed Axle Steel: ASTM A617.
d. Deformed Low-Alloy Steel: ASTM A706.
2. Wire:
a. Cold-Drawn Steel: ASTM A82.
3. Wire Fabric;
a. Welded Steel: ASTM A185.
b. Welded Deformed Steel: ASTM A497.
G. Strand:
1. Uncoated, 7-wire, stress-relieved or low relaxation strand: ASTM A416
(including supplement) -Grade 250K or 270K.
H. Anchors and Inserts:
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE -PLANT CAST 03450 - 5
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1. Materials-Structural Steel: ASTM A36.
2. Finish -Manufacturer's Standards.
I. Grout:
1. Cement Grout: Portland cement, sand and water sufficient for placement and
hydration.
2. Nonshrink Grout: premixed, packaged ferrous and nonferrous aggregate shrink-
resistant grout.
J. Welded Studs:
1. AWS D1.1.
K. Rigid Insulation:
1. Expanded Polystyrene R(min) = 4.17/in. @ 40°
= 3.86/in. @ 75° (aged values).
2. Polyisocyanurate R(min) = 7.5/in.
L. Concrete Mixes:
1. 28-Day Compressive Strength: Minimum of 6000 psi.
2. Release Strength: Minimum of 3500 psi.
3. Use of calcium chloride; chloride ions or other slats are not permitted.
4. Exposed surfaces to have 5 percent entrained air.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Manufacturing procedures shall be in general compliance with PCI MNL-116.
Accurately position cast-in anchors, inserts, plates, angles, and other anchorage
hardware for attachment of loose hardware and secure in place during precasting
operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect the position of the main
reinforcement or the placing of concrete.
B. Supply loose steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps, hangers, and
other hardware shapes not provided by other trades necessary for securing architectural
precast concrete units to supporting and adjacent members.
C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in architectural precast concrete units
to receive windows, cramps, dowels, reglets, waterstops, flashings, and other similar
work as indicated. Coordinate with other trades for installation of cast-in items.
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE -PLANT CAST 03450 - 6
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
D. Reinforcement: Comply with the recommendations of CRSI's "Manual of Standard
Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.
1. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that
reduce or destroy the bond with concrete.
2. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement
during concrete placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal
support devices to prevent exposure on finished surfaces. Do not use plastic-
coated or uncoated metal chair supports. .
3. Place reinforcement to maintain at least 3/4-inch (19-mm) minimum cover after
finishing. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold
reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from
finished, exposed concrete surfaces.
' 4. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces
at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths
to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
E. Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and
erection stresses.
F. Fabricate precast concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed edges
and corners precise and true.
' 1. Edge and Corner Treatment: Uniformly chamfered.
G. Discard architectural precast concrete units that are warped, cracked, broken, spalled,
stained, or otherwise defective unless repairs are permitted by Architect and meet
requirements.
2.3 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Comply with the following overall height and width dimensional tolerances of finished
units measured at face adjacent to mold at time of casting:
t 1. 10 Feet (3 m) or Less: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
2. 10 to 20 Feet (3 to 6 m): Plus 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), minus 3/16 inch (5 mm).
' 3. 20 to 40 Feet (6 to 12 m): Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
4. Each Additional 10 Feet (3 m): Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) per 10 feet (3
m).
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE -PLANT CAST 03450 - 7
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
B. Angular Deviation of Plane of Side Mold: Plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) per 3-inch
(76-mm) depth or plus or minus 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) total, whichever is greater.
' C. Openings Within One Unit: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm), except plus or minus 1/8
inch (3.2 mm) for windows and door frames.
D. Out of Square: Difference in length of two diagonal measurements of 1/8 inch (3.2
mm) per 72 inches (1829 mm) or 1/2-inch (12-mm) total, whichever is greater.
E. Thickness: Minus 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), plus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
F. Locations of Reveals and Architectural Features: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
' G. Other Dimensional Tolerances: Numericall the eater of lus or minus 1/16 inch 1.6
Y Zn' P (
mm) per 10 feet (3 m), or plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
H. Position Tolerances: For cast-in items measured from datum line locations as shown
on Shop Drawings as follows:
1. Inserts: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm).
2. Weld Plates: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
1 3. Handling Devices: Plus or minus 3 inches (76 mm).
4. Block Outs and Reinforcements: Within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of position shown on
' Shop Drawings, where such positions have structural implications or affect
concrete cover; otherwise within plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
' 2.4 FINISHES
A. Finish exposed-face surfaces of architectural precast concrete units as follows to match
Architect's design reference sample. All finishes to match Phase I, Johnson Creek Outlet
Center.
1. Standard Underside: Resulting from casting against approved forms using good
industry practice in cleaning of forms, design of concrete mix, placing and curing.
Small surface holes caused by air bubbles, normal color variations, normal for
joint marks, minor chips and spalls shall be tolerated, but no major or unsightly
imperfections, honeycomb or other defects shall be permitted, unless they are
nonstructural in nature and are patched.
II
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE -PLANT CAST 03450 - 8
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
2. Standard Top: Result of vibrating screed and additional hand finishing at
projections. Normal color variations, minor indentations, minor chips and spalls
shall be permitted. No major imperfections, honeycomb or .defects shall be
permitted.
3. Special Finishes:
a. Rakes:
1. Standard Rake
2. Random Rake _
3. Wide Rake
b. Ribs:
1. Uniform Rib
2. Random Rib
3. Uniform Low Rib
4. Random Low Rib
5. High Rib _
6. Uniform Round Rib
7. Random Round Rib
c. Grooves:
1. Uniform Groove
2. Random Groove
3. Wide Uniform Groove
d. Flat:
1. Steel Form
2. Broom
e. Other:
1. Random Relief
2. Textured
3. Textured Imprint
f. Options:
1. Exposed Aggregate
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE -.PLANT CAST 03450 - 9
a. Red
b. White
c. Off White
d. Buff
e. Plum
f. White Marble
2. Bands
a. Formed Band
b. Troweled Band _
c. Ground Band
' 3. Dovetail for Brick Veneer
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
A. The Owner may employ an independent testing agency to evaluate architectural precast
concrete fabricator's quality control and testing methods.
1. Allow Owner's testing agency access to material storage areas, concrete
production equipment, concrete placement, and curing facilities. Cooperate with
Owner's testing agency and provide samples of materials and concrete mixes as
maybe requested for additional testing and evaluation.
B. Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect architectural precast concrete according to
MNL-117 requirements.
C. Strength of architectural precast concrete units will be considered deficient when they
fail to comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) requirements.
D. Testing: When there is evidence that the strength of architectural precast concrete units
may be deficient or may not meet ACI 318 (ACI 318M) requirements, the Owner will
employ an independent testing agency to obtain, prepare, and test cores drilled from
hardened concrete to determine compressive strength according to ASTM C 42.
1. A minimum of 3 representative cores will be taken from architectural precast
concrete units of suspect strength, from locations directed by Architect.
2. Cores will be tested in an air-dry condition.
3. Strength of concrete for each series of 3 cores will be considered satisfactory if
the average compressive strength is equal to at least 85 percent of the 28-day
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE -.PLANT CAST 03450 - 10
~i
II
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
design compressive strength and no single core is less than 75 percent of the 28-
day design compressive strength.
4. Test results will be made in writing on the same day that tests are made, with
copies to Architect, Contractor, and precast fabricator. Test reports will include
the Project identification name and number, date, name of precast concrete
fabricator, name of concrete testing agency; identification letter, name, and type
of architectural precast concrete unit or units represented by core tests; design
compressive strength, compressive strength at break and type of break, corrected
for length-diameter ratio, and direction of applied load to core with respect to
horizontal plane of concrete as placed. .
E. Patching: Where core test results are satisfactory and architectural precast concrete
units meet requirements, solidly fill core holes with patching mortar and finish to match
adjacent concrete surfaces.
F. Defective Work: Discard architectural precast concrete units that do not conform to
requirements, including strength, manufacturing tolerances, and finishes. Replace with
architectural precast concrete units that meet requirements.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting performance
of architectural precast concrete units. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Do not install architectural precast units until supporting concrete has attained minimum
allowable design compressive strength.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of precast, prestressed concrete shall be performed by the manufacturer or a
competent erector. Members shall be lifted by means of suitable lifting devices at
points provided by the manufacturer. Temporary shoring and bracing, if necessary,
shall comply with the manufacturer's recommendations.
1. The exposed aggregate finish will be pressure washed after the installation by
manufacturer.
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE -PLANT CAST 03450 - 11
i~
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
B. Install clips, hangers, and other accessories required for connecting architectural precast
' concrete units to supporting members and back-up materials.
C. Install architectural precast concrete units plumb, level, and in alignment. Provide
' temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and
alignment as units are being permanently connected.
h
as
1. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint widt
erection progresses.
i
i
st
ng
2. Remove projecting hoisting devices and cement-grout fill recessed ho
devices.
D. Anchor architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or
as otherwise indicated. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as
possible after anchoring and grouting are completed.
i~
i~
n
n
n
n
n
E. Welding: Perform welding in compliance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.4, with
qualified welders.
1. Protect architectural precast concrete units and bearing pads from damage by field
welding or cutting operations and provide noncombustible shields as required.
2. Repair damaged steel surfaces by cleaning and applying a coat of galvanizing
repair paint to galvanized surfaces.
F. At bolted connections use lock washers or other acceptable means to prevent loosening
of nuts.
G. Grouting Connections: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain grout in
place until hard enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping
until voids are completely filled. Place grout to finish smooth, plumb, and level with
adjacent concrete surfaces. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after
initial set. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it hardens.
3.3 ERECTION AND LOCATION TOLERANCES
A. Site Access: General Contractor shall be responsible for providing suitable access to
and around the building, proper drainage and firm, level bearing for the hauling and
erection equipment to operate under their own power.
B. Preparation-General Contractor shall be responsible for:
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE -PLANT CAST 03450 - 12
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' 1. Providing true, level bearing surfaces on all field-placed bearing walls and other
rti
m
ld
l
d
b
f
ng
em
ers.
ie
-p
ace
suppo
' 2. Placement and accurate alignment of anchor bolts, plates or dowels in column
footings, grade beams and other field placed supporting members.
C. Install architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, and true, without
exceeding the recommended erection and location tolerances of MNL-117.
' D. Protection: General Contractor shall be responsible for protecting the open ends of
cores from the elements to prevent trapping of moisture in the cores.
' E. Alignment:. Members shall be properly aligned and leveled as required by the approved
shop drawings. Variations between adjacent members shall be reasonably leveled out
by jacking, loading or any other feasible method as recommended by the manufacture
r and acceptable to the architectlengineer.
' 3.4 REPAIRS
A. .Repair exposed exterior surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match color,
' texture, and uniformity of surrounding concrete when permitted by Architect.
B. Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units when repairs do not
' meet requirements. Should damage occur it shall be repaired by the trade doing the
damage.
' 3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units after erection to remove
' weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains.
1. Wash and rinse according to architectural precast concrete fabricator's
' recommendations. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning
operations.
' 2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of
exposed architectural precast concrete finishes.
END OF SECTION 03450
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE -PLANT CAST 03450 - 13
PHASEI
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 05120 -STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to this Section.
1.2 .SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fabrication and erection of structural steel work, as shown on
drawings including schedules, notes, and details showing size and location of members,
typical connections, and types of steel required.
1. Structural steel is that work defined in American Institute of Steel Construction
(AISC) "Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise shown on drawings.
2. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications are specified elsewhere in Division 5.
3. Refer to Division 3 for anchor bolt installation in concrete, Division 4 for anchor
bolt installation in masonry.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division
1 Specification Sections.
B. Shop drawings including complete details and schedules for fabrication and assembly of
structural steel members, procedures, and diagrams.
1. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols and show size, length, and type of each
weld.
2. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts
and other anchorages to be installed as work of other sections.
1.4 .QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following, except as otherwise
indicated:
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-1
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."
2. AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings," including "Commentary."
' 3. "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" approved
by the Research Council on Structural Connections.
' 4. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 "Structural Welding Code -Steel."
' S. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes,
Sheet Piling .and Bars for Structural Use."
' B. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in
accordance with AWS "Qualification" requirements.
' 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work.
' B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchora e devices which are to be embedded in cast-in- lace
g p
concrete or masonry, in ample time to not to delay work.
C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel
' members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel
members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. If bolts and nuts
become dry or rusty, clean and relubricate before use.
1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or
damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials
' or structures as directed.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
' 2.1 MATERIALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work that will be exposed to view, use only
materials that are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust and scale
' seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. Remove such blemishes
by grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treal:ing, and applying surface.
finishes.
,i B. Wide Flange Structural Steel Shapes: ASTM A572, Grade '~0. Other structural steel
shapes, plates, and bars: ASTM A36.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-2
i~
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
C. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B; or ASTM A 501.
1. Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized.
E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307 or ASTM A36, nonheaded type unless otherwise indicated.
F. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts,
and hardened washers, as follows:
1. Quenched and tempered medium-carbon steel bolts, nuts, and washers, complying
with ASTM A 325.
G. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code.
H. Structural Steel Primer Paint: SSPC -Paint 2; red lead-iron oxide, oil alkyd.
I. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean, uniformly
graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0
parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies. in shop
to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC
Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural
members where indicated.
1. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for
delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of
materials.
2. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before
start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final
structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects.
B. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated.
C. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are
indicated.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-3
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1. Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for principal bolted connections, except
' where unfinished bolts are indicated.
2. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for only bolted connections of secondary
' framing members to primary members (including purlins, girts, and other framing
members taking only nominal stresses) and for temporary bracing to facilitate
erection.
D. High-Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners in
accordance with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490
' Bolts."
E. Welded Construction: Comply with AW
S Code for procedures, .appearance and quality
_
of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
F. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will produce true alignment of
axes without warp.
G. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes re uired for securin other work to structural steel
q g
framing and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on final
shop drawings
.
H. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive
' other work.
I. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame-cut holes or
enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.
' 2.3 SHOP PAINTING
A. General: Shop-paint structural steel, except those members or portions of members to be
' embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel that is partially exposed on
exposed portions and initial 2 inches of embedded areas only.
' 1. Do not paint surfaces to be welded or high-strength bolted with friction-type
connections.
' 2. Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection.
Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.
' B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted.
Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Clean steel in
' accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows:
1. SP-3 "Power-Tool Cleaning."
i
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-4
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer
' paint in accordance with manfucturer's instructions and at a rate to provide dry film
thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use painting methods that result in full coverage
' of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
' A. General: Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in
mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections
' and tests will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and
fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements.
' 1. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components that do not
comply.
B. Design of Members and Connections: Details shown are typical; similar details apply
to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at site whenever
' possible without causing delay in the work.
1. Promptly notify Architect whenever design of members and connections for any
portion of structure are not clearly indicated.
i
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
A. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members
with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary
members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections
are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structures -as
erection proceeds.
' B. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary
to effectively complete work.
' C. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of
bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom
' surface of base and bearing plates.
1. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on
' wedges or other adjusting devices.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-5
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and
plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with
edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout.
3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no
voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to
' cure.
4. For proprietary grout materials, comply with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Field Assembly: Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated.
Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in
permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for
discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
E. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances.
F. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating
temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time
of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in
service.
G. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings.
H. Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with
plug. welds, and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.
1. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary
connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field
welds.
2. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins, except
in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit
bolts.
I. Gas Cutting: Do not use cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in
primary structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members that
are not under stress, as acceptable to Architect. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a
sheared appearance when permitted.
1
' STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-6
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
J. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as
used for shop painting.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.
' 3.2 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Engage an independent testing and inspection agency to inspect high-strength bolted
connections and welded connections and to perform tests and prepare test reports.
B. Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests, state in each report whether test
specimens comply with requirements, and specifically state any deviations therefrom.
C. Provide access for testing agency to places where structural steel work is being
fabricated or produced so that required inspection and testing can be accomplished.
D. Testing agency may inspect structural steel at plant before shipment.
E. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work that inspections and laboratory test reports
' have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at
Contractor's expense, as necessary to reconfirm any noncompliance of original work
and to show compliance of corrected work.
F. Shop-Bolted Connections: Inspect or test in accordance with AISC specifications.
1. Verify that gaps of installed Direct Tension Indicators are less than gaps
specified in ASTM F 959, Table 2.
G. Shop Welding: Inspect and test during fabrication of structural steel assemblies, "as
follows:
1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and
locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to
' correct deficiencies.
2. Perform visual inspection of all welds.
R 3. Perform tests of welds as follows. Inspection procedures listed are to be used at
Contractor's option.
' a. Liquid Penetrant Ins ection: ASTM E 165.
p
' STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-7
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and
on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration not
acceptable.
c. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum
quality level " 2-2T."
d. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
H. Field-Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC specifications.
1. For Direct Tension Indicators, comply with requirements of ASTM F 959.
Verify that gaps are less than gaps specified in Table 2.
I. Field Welding: Inspect and test during erection of structural steel as follows:
1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and
locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to
correct deficiencies.
2. Perform visual inspection of all welds.
3. Perform tests of welds as follows:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and
on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration not
acceptable.
c. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum
quality level " 2-2T."
d. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
END OF SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-8
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 05220 -STEEL JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes steel joists and joist girders for floor and roof framing. Types of
joists required include the following:
1. K-Series Open Web Steel Joists.
2. LH-Series Longspan Steel Joists.
3. Joist Girders.
B. Refer to Division 4 Sections for installation of anchors set in masonry.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division
1 Specification Sections.
B. Shop drawings showing layout of joist members, special connections, joining and
accessories. Include mark, number, type, location and spacing of joists and bridging.
1. Provide templates or location drawings for installation of anchor bolts and metal
bearing plates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Provide joists fabricated in compliance with Steel Joist Institute (SJI)
"Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist
Girders."
B. Qualification of Field Welding: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in
accordance with American Welding Society (AWS) "Structural Welding Code -Steel,"
AWS D1.1.
C. Inspection: Inspect joists and girders in accordance with SJI "Specifications."
STEEL JOISTS AND JOIST GIlZDERS 05220 - 1
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle steel joists as recommended in SJI "Specifications." Handle
and store joists in a manner to avoid deforming members and to avoid excessive stresses.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel: Comply with SJI "Specifications" for chord and web sections.
B. Steel Bearing Plates: ASTM A 36.
C. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular hexagon type, low
carbon steel.
D. Steel Prime Paint: Comply with SJI "Specifications."
2.2 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate steel joists in accordance with SJI "Specification."
B. Holes in Chord Members: Provide holes in chord members where shown for securing
other work to steel joists; however, deduct area of holes from the area of chord when
calculating strength of member.
C. Extended End: Provide extended ends on joists where indicated, complying with SJI
"Specifications" and load tables.
D. Top Chord Extension: Provide top chord extensions ("S" type) on joists where
indicated, complying with SJI "Specifications" and load tables.
E. Bridging: Provide horizontal or diagonal type bridging for joists and joist girders,
complying with SJI "Specifications."
1. Provide bridging anchors for ends of bridging lines terminating at walls or
beams.
F. End Anchorage: Provide end anchorages, including steel bearing plates, to secure
joists to adjacent construction, complying with SJI "Specifications."
G. Shop Painting: Remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from
fabricated joists and accessories before application of shop paint.
STEEL JOISTS AND JOIST GIlZDERS 05220 - 2
PHASEI
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1. Apply one shop coat of steel prime paint to joists and accessories, by spraying,
dipping, or other method to provide a continuous dry paint film thickness of not
less than 0.50 mil.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
A. Place and secure steel joists in accordance with SJI "Specifications," final shop
drawings, and as herein specified.
B. Anchors: Furnish anchor bolts, steel bearing plates, and other devices to be built into
concrete and masonry construction.
C. Placing Joists: Do not start placement of steel joists until supporting work is in place
and secured. Place joists on supporting work, adjust and align in accurate locations
and spacing before permanently fastening.
II
D. Provide temporary bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure lateral stability during
construction.
1. Where "open-web" joist lengths are 40 feet and longer, install a center row of
bolted bridging to provide lateral stability before slackening of hoisting lines.
E. Bridging: Install bridging simultaneously with joist erection, before construction loads
are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminating
at walls or beams.
F. Fastening Joists: Comply with the following:
1. Field weld joists to supporting steel framework and steel bearing plates where
indicated in accordance with SJI "Specifications" for type of joists used.
Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placing of joists.
2. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SJI
"Specifications" for type of joists used.
a. Use unfinished threaded fasteners for bolted connections, unless otherwise
indicated.
STEEL JOISTS AND JOIST GIItDERS
05220 - 3
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
G. Touch-Up Painting: After joist installation, wire brush welded areas, abraded or rusty
surfaces, and clean with solvent. Paint field-applied bolt heads and nuts and prepared
surfaces on joists and steel supporting members. Use same type of paint as used for
shop painting.
END OF SECTION 05220
STEEL JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS 05220 - 4
PHASE I
NIINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 05310 -STEEL DECK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes steel deck units for roof applications.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division
1 Specification Sections.
1.4
1. Shop drawings showing layout and types of deck units, anchorage details, and
conditions requiring closure strips, supplementary framing, sump pans, cant strips,
cut openings, special jointing, and other accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes and standards,
except as otherwise indicated:
1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), "Specification for the Design of
Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."
2. American Welding Society (AWS), D1.3 "Structural Welding Code -Sheet Steel."
3. Steel Deck Institute (SDI), "Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks
and Roof Decks."
B. Qualification of Field Welding: Use qualified welding processes and welding operators
in accordance with "Welder Qualification" procedures of AWS.
STEEL DECK 05310 - 1
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, NIINNESOTA
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that maybe incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the
following:
1. Bowman Metal Deck Div., Cyclops Corp.
2. Epic Metals Corp.
3. Vulcraft Div., Nucor Corp.. _
4. Wheeling Corrugating Co.
2.2
MATERIALS
A. Steel for Painted Metal Deck Units: ASTM A 611, grade as required to comply with
SDI specifications.
B. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36.
C. Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTM A 526, commercial quality, galvanized.
D. Paint: Manufacturer's baked-on, rust-inhibitive paint, for application to metal surfaces
that have been chemically cleaned and phosphate chemical treated.
2.3
FABRICATION
A. General: Form deck units in lengths to span three or more supports, with flush,
telescoped, or nested 2-inch laps at ends and interlocking or nested side laps, of metal
thickness, depth, and width as indicated.
B. Roof Deck Units: Provide deck configurations that comply with SDI ".Specifications. and
Commentary for Steel Roof Deck."
C. Metal Cover Plates: Fabricate metal cover plates for end-abutting floor deck units of not
less than same thickness as decking. Form to match contour of deck units and
approximately 6 inches wide.
D. Metal Closure Strips: Fabricate metal closure strips, for cell raceways and openings
between decking and other construction, of not less than 0.045-inch min. (18 gage) sheet
steel. Form to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of cells or flutes and sides of
decking.
STEEL DECK 05310 - 2
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' PART3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
~ A. General: Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations, shop drawings, and as specified herein.
B. Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends
accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before being permanently
fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks.
C. Align deck units for entire length of run of cells and with close alignment between cells
*j
^ at ends of abutting units.
D. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or deflection.
E. Coordinate and coo erate with s ctur n 1
p tru al steel erector m locating decking bu des to
prevent overloading of structural members.
F. Fastening Deck Units:
1
F
fl
d
k
i
.
asten
oor
ec
un
ts to steel supporting members by nominal 5/8- inch puddle
welds or elongated welds of equal strength, spaced as shown in the drawings with
t a minimum of two welds per unit at each support.
2. Use self-tapping No. 8 or larger machine screws at 4 feet o.c. for fastening end
closures.
3. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc
welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding
work.
a. Use welding washers where recommended by deck manufacturer.
' 4. Uplift Loading: Install and anchor roof deck units to resist gross uplift loading of
44.91bs. psf at eave overhang and 25.41bs. psf for other roof areas.
G. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work
projecting through or adjacent to the decking, as shown.
H. Reinforcement at Openings: Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces
as required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work shown.
i~
STEEL DECK 05310 - 3
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
I. Hanger Slots or Clips: Provide UL-approved punched hanger slots between cells or
flutes of lower element where floor deck units are to receive hangers far support of
ceiling construction, air ducts, diffusers, or lighting. fixtures.
1. Hanger clips designed to clip over male side lap joints of floor deck units may be
used instead of hanger slots.
2. Locate slots or clips at not more than 14 inches o.c. in both directions, not over 9
inches from walls at ends, and not more than 12 inches from walls at sides, unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Provide manufacturer's standard hanger attachment devices.
J. Closure Strips: Provide metal closure strips at open uncovered ends and edges of roof
decking and in voids between decking and other construction. Weld into position to
provide a complete decking installation.
K. Touch-Up Painting: After decking installation, wire brush, clean, and paint scarred
areas, welds, and rust spots on top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting
steel members. _
1. Touch-up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Touch-up painted surfaces with same type of shop paint used on adjacent surfaces.
L. In areas where shop-painted surfaces are to be exposed, apply touch-up paint to blend
into adjacent surfaces.
END OF SECTION 05310
STEEL DECK 05310 - 4
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 05400 -COLD-FORMED METAL FRANIlNG
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Types ofcold-formed metal framing, as shown in the drawings, include the following:
1. Exterior Wall Framing: C-shaped steel studs.
2. Interior Wall Framing: C-shaped steel studs.
3. Canopy and Feature Roof Framing: C-shaped steel joists.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division
1 Specification Sections.
1. Product data and installation instructions for each item of cold-formed metal
framing and accessories.
2. Shop drawings for special components and installations not fully dimensioned or
detailed in manufacturer's product data.
a. Include placing drawings for framing members showing size and gage
designations, number, type, location, and spacing. Indicate supplemental
strapping, bracing, splices, bridging, accessories, and details required for
proper installation.
3. Structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Component Design: Calculate structural properties of studs and joists in accordance
with American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) "Specification for Design of Cold-Formed
Steel Structural Members."
B. Welding: Use qualified welders and comply with American Welding Society (AWS)
D1.3, "Structural Welding Code -Sheet Steel."
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 1
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
1. Dale Industries, Inc.
2. Dietrich Industries, Inc.
3. USG Industries
4. United States Steel _
5. Wheeling Corrugating Co.
2.2 METAL FRAMING
A. System Components: Manufacturers' standard load-bearing steel studs and joists of
type, size, shape, and gage as indicated. With each type of metal framing required,
provide manufacturer's standard, steel runners (tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles,
shoes, reinforcements, fasteners, and accessories for applications indicated, as needed to
provide a complete metal framing system.
B. Materials and Finishes:
1. For 16-gage and heavier units, fabricate metal framing components of structural
quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 40,000 psi; ASTM A 446, A
570, or A 611.
2. For 18-gage and lighter units, fabricate metal framing components of commercial
quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi; ASTM A 446, A
570, or A 611.
3. Provide galvanized finish to metal framing components complying with ASTM
A525 for minimum G60 coating.
4. Fasteners: Provide nuts, bolts, washers, screws, and other fasteners with
corrosion-resistant plated finish.
5. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code and as recommended by stud
manufacturer.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 2
2.3
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
FABRICATION
A. General: Framing components may be prefabricated into assemblies before erection.
Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line, and braced against racking with joints
welded. Perform lifting of prefabricated units to prevent damage or distortion.
' B. Fabricate units in jig templates to hold members in proper alignment and position and to
assure consistent component placement.
1 C. Fastenings: Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by
welding, bolting, or screw fasteners, as standard with manufacturer.
D. Wire tying of framing components is not permitted.
E. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate units to a maximum allowable tolerance variation
' from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
' A. General: Install metal framing systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed or
written instructions and recommendations.
'
B. Runner Tracks: Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately to
layout at base and tops of studs. Secure tracks as recommended by stud manufacturer for
type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24 inches o.c. spacing for nail or
power-driven fasteners or 16 inches o.c. for other types of attachment. Provide fasteners
at corners and ends of tracks.
'
C. Installation of Wall Studs: Secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks by either
welding or screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges.
'
D. Set studs lamb exce t as needed for dia oval bracin or re aired for non lamb walls
p p g g q p
or warped surfaces and similar requirements.
E. Where stud system abuts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, anchor
ends of stiffeners to supporting structure.
F. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in metal framing system wherever
' walls or partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework,
heavy trim and furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to the wall or
partition. Where type of supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 3
'
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
1 ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
stud manufacturer's recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering
' weight or loading resulting from item supported.
' G. Frame wall openings larger than 2 feet square with double stud at each jamb of frame
except where more than two are either shown or indicated in manufacturer's instructions.
Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to
jamb studs with stud shoes or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height studs
of wall. Secure stud system wall opening frame in manner indicated.
' H. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints with separate studs; do not bridge the
joint with components of stud system.
' I. Install horizontal stiffeners in stud system, spaced (vertical distance) at not more than 54
inches o.c. Weld at each intersection.
' J. Erection Tolerances: Bolt or weld wall panels (at both horizontal and vertical junctures)
to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints.
' 1. Maximum variation in plane and true position between prefabricated assemblies
should not exceed 1/16 inch.
' K. Installation of Joists: Install level, straight, and plumb, complete with bracing and
reinforcing as indicated on drawings. Provide not less than 1-1/2-inch end bearing.
L. Reinforce ends with end clips, steel hangers, steel angle clips, steel stud section, or as
otherwise recommended by joist manufacturer.
M. Where required, reinforce joists at interior supports with single short length of joist
section located directly over interior support, snap-on shoe, 30 percent side-piece lapped
reinforcement, or other method recommended by joist manufacturer.
' N. Secure joists to interior support systems to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange.
O. Field Paintin Touch-u dama ed sho -a lied rotective coatin s. Use com atible
g p g P PP p g p
primer for prime-coated surfaces; use galvanizing repair system for galvanized surfaces.
END OF SECTION 05400
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05400 - 4
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 05500 -METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to work of this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following metal fabrications:
1. Ladders.
2. Loose bearing and leveling plates.
3. Loose steel lintels.
4. Ornamental metal work.
5. Pipe bollards.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for structural steel framing system
components.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and
bolts specified for installation under other sections.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing metal fabrications
similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce
required units without causing delay in the Work.
B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of metal fabrications specified in this
section by same firm that fabricated them.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
C. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1
"Structural Welding Code -Steel," D 1.3 "Structural Welding Code -Sheet Steel", and
D1.2 "Structural Welding Code -Aluminum."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for
welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
' 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
' A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which
metal fabrications must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show
recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
' construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 FERROUS METALS
' A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the
Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom
from surface blemishes. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting,
' seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, roughness, and, for steel sheet, variations
in flatness exceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcher-leveled sheet.
' B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bazs: ASTM A 36.
C. Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and as follows:
1. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, grade as indicated below:
a. Grade B, unless otherwise indicated or required for design loading.
' D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; finish, type, and weight class as follows:
1. Galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
2. Type F, standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated, or another
weight, type, and grade required by structural loads.
E. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select in accordance with AWS specifications for
' the metal alloy to be welded.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
2.2
GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A. Nonshrink Metallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, ferrous aggregate grout
complying with CE CRD-C 621, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy
duty loading applications of type specified in this section.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated in the Work include but are not limited to the following:
1. Nonshrink Metallic Grouts:
a. "Metox RM"; Chem-Masters Corp.
b. "Hi Mod Grout"; Euclid Chemical Co.
c. "Embeco 885 and 636"; Master Builders.
d. "Ferrolith G Redi-Mix and G-NC"; Sonneborn Building Products Div.,
Rexnord Chemical Products, Inc.
2.3
FASTENERS
A. General: Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls.
Select fasteners for the type; grade, and class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A.
C. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561.
D. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92.
E. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-111.
F. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.
G. Drilled-In Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors complying with FS FF-S-325, Group
VIII (anchors, expansion, [nondrilling]), Type I (internally threaded tubular expansion
anchor); and machine bolts complying with FS FF-B-575, Grade 5.
H. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class, and style as required.
I. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3
2.4
PAINT
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing,
lead-free, universal modified alkyd primer selected for good resistance to normal
atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and for
capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged
exposure complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-645.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in
galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight,
and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint-20.
' 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not
' less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to
dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication
' and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each
metal fabrication.
B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight
sharp edges.
C. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
D. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
' Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
' E. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. '
' F. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS recommendations and the
following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
' corrosion resistance of base metals.
' 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
' METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 4
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so
' that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches
those adjacent.
G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated,
' Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
H. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate
' and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use.
I. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field
' splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
'
J. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish
' hardware, screws, and similar items.
'
K. Fabricate
oints that will be ex osed to weather in a manner to exclude water or rovide
J P ~ p
weep holes where water may accumulate.
2.6 STEEL LADDERS
'
A. General: Fabricate ladders for the location shown, with dimensions, spacings, details
and anchorages as indicated. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3.
B. Siderails: Continuous steel flat bars, 3/8 inch x 2-1/2 inches, with eased edges, spaced
18 inches apart.
'
C. Bar Rungs: Round steel bars, 3/4 inch diameter, spaced 12 inches o.c.
' D. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
' E. Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more than
5'-0" o
c
b
means of welded or bolt
d st
l b
ackets
.
.
y
e
ee
r
.
' 1. Size brackets to support design dead and live loads indicated and to hold centerline
of ladder rungs clear of the wall surface by not less than 7 inches.
' 2. Extend side rails 42 inches above top rung, and return rails to wall or structure
unless other secure handholds are provided. If the adjacent structure does not
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 5
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' extend above the top rung, goose-neck the extended rails back to the structure to
provide secure ladder access.
F. Provide non-slip surface on top of each rung, either by coating the rung with aluminum
oxide granules set in epoxy resin adhesive, or by using a type of manufactured rung
which is filled with aluminum oxide grout.
2.7 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of required thickness and bearing
area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. Galvanize after
' fabrication.
2.8 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
' A. Fabricate loose structural steel lintels from steel an les and sha es of size indicated for
g p
' openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
B. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.
C. Size loose lintels for equal bearing of one inch per foot of clear span but not less than 8
inches bearing at each side of openings, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
1 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated or which are not a
' part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work.
B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive adjacent
other construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel
shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field
connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.
1. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building
' into masonry. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed.
a. Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches o.c. and provide
minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps l-1/4 inches wide x 1/4
inch x 8 inches long.
I~
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 6
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
t ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports in the following locations:
1. Exterior locations.
2.10 PIPE BOLLARDS
' A. Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe. Cap bollards with 1/4 inch
minimum thickness steel base plate.
B. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4 inch thick steel plate
' welded to bottom of sleeve.
2.11 ORNAMENTAL METAL WORK
A. Form ornamental metal to required shapes and sizes, with true curves, lines, and angles.
Provide components in sizes and profiles indicated, but not less than that needed to
' comply with requirements indicated for structural performance.
' B. Provide necessary rebates, lugs, and brackets to assemble units and to attach to other
work. Drill and tap for required fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. Use concealed
fasteners where possible.
i
C. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding and brazing. Provide
welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed
side. Clean exposed welded and brazed joints of all flux, and dress all exposed and
contact surfaces.
D. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed to
weather to exclude water penetration.
E. Provide castings that are sound and free of warp, cracks, blowholes, or other defects that
impair strength or appearance. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to
remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks.
F. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and arris.
G. Assemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces.
1 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 7
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
H. Make up wire-rope assemblies in the shop to field-measured dimensions with fittings
machine swaged. Minimize amount of turnbuckle take-up used for dimensional
adjustment so maximum amount is available for tensioning wire ropes. Tag wire-rope
assemblies and fittings to identify installation locations and orientations for coordinated
installation.
2.12 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAANIM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to
application and designations of finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.13 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
1 A. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc-coating by the hot-dip
process compliance with the following requirements:
1. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.
2. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel
products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and
strip 0.0299 inch thick and heavier.
'
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and
' environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
' "
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone lA): SSPC-SP3
Power Tool Cleaning:
r C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with
galvanized finish or to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry,
' unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PAl "Paint Application
Specification No. 1" for shop painting.
' 1. Stripe paint all edges, corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 8
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions,
and directions for installation of anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor
bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where
necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; include
threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag
bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in
location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of
rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete masonry or similar construction.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections
that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping
size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have
been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field
connections.
E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc
welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding
work, and the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 9
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so
that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches
those adjacent.
r 3.3 SETTING LOOSE PLATES
1 A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond-reducing materials, and
roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates.
B. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices. After the
bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not
remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the bearing
' plate before packing with grout.
1. Use metallic nonshrink grout in concealed locations where not exposed to
' moisture; use nonmetallic nonshrink grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids
remain.
' 3.4 INSTALLATION OF BOLLARDS
t
~_J
A. Anchor bollards in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete.
After bollards have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between bollard and
sleeve solid with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout
manufacturer's directions.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for
shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touch-up of field painted
surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05500
' METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 10
LJ
i~
i~
METAL FABRICATIONS
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
05500 - 11
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 06100 -ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
2. Wood grounds, nailers, and blocking.
3. Plywood sheathing.
4. Air infiltration barrier.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to
view and not specified in another Section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility for Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire-
retardant-treated wood products from one source for both treatment and fire-retardant
formulation.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to
weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and
other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary
coverings including polyethylene and similar materials.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL
A. Lumber Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with PS 20 "American
Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies
certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1
PHASE I
NIINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
B. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory-marked with grade stamp of
' inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying
grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
C. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes
as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use.
2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER
' A. For light framing (2 to 4 inches thick, 2 to 4 inches wide) provide the following grade
and species:
1. "Standard" grade.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
' A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction including
rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, fumng,
grounds, stripping, and similar members.
B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into
shapes shown.
' C. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood
preservative treatment.
D. Grade: "Standard" grade light-framing-size lumber of any species or board-size lumber
as required. "No. 3 Common" or "Standard" grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules.
or "No. 2 Boards" per SPIB rules.
' E. Wall Sheathing: APA RATED NON-COMBUSTIBLE PLYWOOD SHEATHING.
' 2.4
n
1. Exposure Durability Classification: EXTERIOR.
2. .Span Rating: As required to suit stud spacing indicated.
3. Fire retardant treated typically.
CONSTRUCTION PANELS FOR BACKING
A. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide
fire-retardant-treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-D PLUGGED
EXPOSURE 1, in thickness indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than 15/32
inch.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 2
PHASE I
NIINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
2.5 AIIZ INFILTRATION BARRIER
A. Asphalt-saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt
felt}, unperforated.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high
relative humidity, provide fasteners with ahot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153
or of AISI Type 304 stainless steel.
B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105.
C. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ANSI B 18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1.
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts
and where indicated, flat washers.
2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. General: Provide metal framing anchors of type, size, metal, and finish indicated that
comply with requirements specified including the following:
1. Current Evaluation/Research Reports: Provide products for which model code
evaluation/research reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and that evidence compliance of metal framing anchors for application
indicated with the building code in effect for this Project.
2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products for which manufacturer publishes
allowable design loads that are determined from empirical data or by rational
engineering analysis and that are demonstrated by comprehensive testing
performed by a qualified independent testing laboratory.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 3
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Steel sheet zinc-coated by hot-dip process on continuous lines
' prior to fabrication to comply with ASTM A 525 for Coating Designation G60 and with
ASTM A 446, Grade A (structural quality); ASTM A 526 (commercial quality); or
' ASTM A 527 (lock-forming quality); as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor
indicated.
2.8 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS
A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated aspreservative-treated wood or is
' specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards
C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood). Mark each treated item with the AWPB or SPIB
Quality Mark Requirements.
' B. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives to a minimum
retention of 0.25 pcf. For interior uses, after treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a
' maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. Treat indicated
items and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and
similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and
waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members
in contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade.
' 2.9 FIRE-RETARDANT TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS
' A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated wood is indicated, pressure impregnate lumber and
plywood with fire-retardant chemicals to comply with AWPA C20 and C27,
respectively, for treatment type indicated; identify "fire-retardant- treated wood" with
' appropriate classification marking of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., U.S. Testing,
Timber Products Inspection, Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
' 1 - r
Current Evaluation/Research Reports: Provide fire-retardant treated wood fo
' which a current model code evaluation/research report exists that is acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction and that evidences compliance of
fire-retardant-treated wood for application indicated.
B. Exterior Type: Use for exterior building framing including sheathing and decking.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 4
PHASEI
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVII~LE, MINNESOTA
C. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or
' defective pieces.
' D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, fire-retardant-treated
wood products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
' 1. Exterior Type Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood:
a. "Exterior Fire-X," Hoover Treated Wood Products.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction
and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or
' optimum j oint arrangement.
B. Set rou h c en to re aired levels and lines with members lamb and true to line
g ~ ~' q ,
p
_
and cut and fitted.
C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit.
Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow
' attachment of other construction.
' D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as
indicated.
E. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. -
F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work.
' Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be
exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between
members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required.
3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS
' A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required
for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required
' for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work
involved.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 5
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts
flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of
masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Form No. E30, "APA
Design/Construction Guide -Residential & Commercial," for types of construction
panels and applications indicated.
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Sheathing: Nail to framing.
2. Plywood Backing Panels: Nail to supports.
3.4 AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER
A. Cover sheathing with air infiltration barrier as follows:
1. Apply asphalt-saturated organic felt horizontally with 2-inch overlap and 6-inch
endlap; fasten to sheathing with corrosion-resistant staples.
END OF SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 6
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 06200 -FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Soffit vents.
2. Soffit access louvers.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for,furring, blocking, and other carpentry
work that is not exposed to view.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract.
B. Product data for each type of factory-fabricated product and process specified,
including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual
components, profiles, textures, and colors.
C. Shop drawings showing full dimensions of each member and layout of entire heavy
timber system. Show details of connections, connectors and other accessories.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure
to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood
and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under
temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials.
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 1
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1
SOFFIT VENTS
A. Material: Extruded aluminum.
Size: 4" wide x 8'-0" lengths continuous.
Manufacturer: Air Vent Inc. or approved equal.
2.2
SOFFIT ACCESS LOUVERS
A. Material:. Extruded aluminum stationary blade louver.
B. Size: As shown on drawings.
C. Manufacturer: Airolite Inc., or approved equal.
D. Style: Narrow profile, 2" deep, #K6742, with 1/2" mesh .063" aluminum bird screen.
Frames shall be provided with flat flange connection and subframe for periodic
removal and access through louver openings.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting installation and performance of finish carpentry. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas before installation for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning
recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted,
improperly treated or finished, not adequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with
proper jointing arrangements.
1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
FII~TISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 2
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
B. Install finish carpentry plumb, level, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use
concealed shims where required for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level. Install adjoining
finish carpentry with 1/16 inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/8
inch maximum offset for reveal installation.
3. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems that may be in or
adjacent to standing and running trim and rails. Provide cutouts for mechanical
and electrical items that penetrate exposed surfaces of trim and rails.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or
visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. Adjust joinery
for uniform appearance.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up
factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure finish carpentry is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 3
PHASE I
1\~IINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVII,LE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 07210 -BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Insulation under slabs-on-grade -interior and exterior.
2. Building insulation in Batt form.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for polystyrene board insulation installed in
masonry cells.
2. Division 7 Section indicated below for foam plastic insulation specified as part of
these systems:
a. "Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems -Class PM."
3. Division 7 Roofing Section indicated below for roof insulation specified as part of
roofing construction:
a. "Single Ply Membrane Roofing."
1.3 DEFIl~ITIONS
A. Thermal Resistivity: Where the thermal resistivity of insulation products are designated
by "r-values," they represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-values). Thermal
conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick.
Thermal resistivities are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between
the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through one square foot per
hour at mean temperatures indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division
1 Specification Sections.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1
C
PHASE I
1\RNNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
B. Product data for each type of insulation product specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials identical to those whose
indicated fire performance characteristics have been determined per the ASTM test
method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting .organizations acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing and inspecting organization.
B. Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building
insulation from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with
manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and protection during
installation.
' PART 2 -PRODUCTS
' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering insulation products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
ii
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation products of
one of the following:
1. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation:
a. Amoco Foam Products Co.
b. DiversiFoam Products.
c. Dow: The Dow Chemical Company.
d. UC Industries, Inc.
2. Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Corp.
b. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2
1
0
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
c. Manville: Building Insulations Div., Manville Sales Corp.
d. Owens/Corning Fiberglas Corp.
2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with
referenced standards.
B. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polystyrene thermal insulation
with closed-cells and integral high density skin, formed by the expansion of polystyrene
base resin in an extrusion process to comply with ASTM C 578 for type indicated; with
5-year aged r-values of 5.4 and 5 at 40 and 75 deg F (4.4 and 23.9 deg C), respectively;
and as follows:
1. Type IV, 1.6 pcf min. density, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed
values of 75 and 450, respectively.
C. Unfaced Glass Fiber Board Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by combining glass
fibers with thermosetting resin binders to comply with ASTM C 612 for Class indicated;
and as follows:
D. Faced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by
combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply
with ASTM C 665 for Type III, Class A (blankets with reflective vapor-retarder
' membrane facing with flame spread of 25 or less); foil-scrim-kraft or
foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on one face, and as follows:
1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass or slag.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed
values of 25 and 50, respectively.
' PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
' A. Examine substrates and conditions with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements of the Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to
' determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not
proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3
0
ii
3.2 PREPARATION
PHASEI
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including
removal of projections that might puncture vapor retarders.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions applicable to products and
application indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project
.conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations
before proceeding with installation of insulation.
B. Extend insulation full thickness as indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut
and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections
that interfere with placement.
C. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or
required to make up total thickness.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER & UNDER-SLAB INSULATION -INTERIOR & EXTERIO
A. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces (from damage during back-filling).
B. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation (from damage during concrete work).
3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's
recommendations. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with
adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support 'of
units.
B. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive,
mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place.
Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by
insulation manufacturer.
C. Set vapor retarder faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, except as
otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.
I~
~~
1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of
insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 4
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVII,LE, MINNESOTA
D. Set reflective, foil-faced units accurately with not less than 0.75-inch air space in front of
foil as indicated.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful
weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or
enclosures where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and
.protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 5
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 07241 -EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS -CLASS PB
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to work of this
section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Applications over gypsum sheathing.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for gypsum sheathing.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" for sealing joints in system with elastomeric
joint sealants.
3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Drywall" for steel-stud-framed exterior walls
finished on interior with gypsum wallboard.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exterior insulation and finish systems refer to exterior assemblies composed of an inner
layer of board insulation and an outer layer composed of aglass-fiber-mesh-reinforced
base coat applied directly to board insulation and a textured protective finish coat. These
assemblies are applied to supporting substrates of construction indicated.
B. Designation PB for class of exterior insulation and finish systems specified in this
section is based on the classification developed by the Exterior Insulation Manufacturers
Association (ETNA).
C. System in this section refers to Class PB exterior insulation and finish systems.
D. System manufacturer refers to the manufacturer of exterior insulation and finish systems.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide systems complying with the following performance requirements:
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 1
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' 1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within system components or between
system and supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind
loads, weather, or other in-service conditions.
2. Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into system and
assemblies behind it or through them into interior of building that results in
deterioration of thermal-insulating effectiveness or other degradation of system
and assemblies behind system including substrates, supporting wall construction,
and interior finish.
3. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide materials and construction that are
identical to those tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per test
method indicated below, by testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of
applicable testing and inspecting organization.
a. Flame S read of Insulation Board and Finish Coats: 25 or less when tested
P
individually per ASTM E 84.
1.5 SUBMITTALS _
' A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division
1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each component of exterior insulation and finish systems.
' C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of system including plans,
elevations, sections, details of components, joint locations and configurations within
system and between system and construction penetrating it, and attachments to
construction behind system. '
' D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard color charts and
small-scale samples indicating available textural choices.
' E. Samples for verification purposes in the form of 2-foot-square panels for each finish,
color, and texture specified. Prepare samples using same tools and techniques intended
for actual work.
l
f
or
co
1. Incorporate within each sample a typical control joint filled with sealant o
indicated or selected.
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS -CLASS PB 07241 - 2
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing systems that
are similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful
in-service performance.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified in writing by
system manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's system.
' C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain materials for system from either a single
manufacturer or manufacturers approved by the system manufacturer as compatible with
other system components.
D. Field-Constructed Mock-Up: Prior to installation of system, erect mock-ups for each
form of wall construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample
' submittals and to demonstrate esthetic effects including those related to execution. Build
mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final
' work:
1. Locate mock-ups on site in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as
' directed by Architect.
2. Demonstrate the proposed range of color, texture, and workmanship to be
' expected in completed work.
3. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mock-ups before start of final work.
' 4. Retain and maintain mock-u s Burin construction for 'ud in com leted work.
p g J g g p
' a. When directed, demolish mock-ups and remove from Project site.
' 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products m ongmal, unopened packages and contamers with manufacturer's
' labels identifying products legible and intact.
B. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from the weather,
' direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, damage
from construction traffic, and other causes.
C. Stack insulation boards flat and off the ground.
u~'
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS -CLASS PB 07241 - 3
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install system when ambient outdoor temperatures
' are 40 deg F (4 deg C) and falling unless temporary protection and heat are provided to
maintain ambient temperatures above 40 deg F (4 deg C) during installation of wet
materials and for 24 hours after installation or longer to allow them to become
' thoroughly dry and weather resistant.
1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence installation of system with related work specified in other sections to ensure
that wall assemblies, including flashing, trim, and joint sealers, are protected against
' damage from weather, aging, corrosion, and other causes.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering Class PB systems that may be incorporated in the work include but are not
' limited to the following:
1. DRYVIT Systems Inc.
' 2. Synergy Inc.
3. STO Industries Inc.
4. Parex Inc.
' 2.2 MATERIALS
' A. Compatibility: Provide adhesive, board insulation, reinforcing fabrics, base and finish
coat materials, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and
' approved for use by system manufacturer.
B. Colors and Textures of Protective Coating: Comply with the following requirements:
' 1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard
colors and textures for type of finish coat indicated.
C. Surface-Sealer: System manufacturer's standard adhesion intermediary designed to
improve bond between substrate of type indicated and adhesive for application of
' insulation.
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FII~TISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 4
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
D. Adhesive for Application of Insulation: System manufacturer's standard formulation
' designed for indicated use, compatible with substrate, and complying with the
following requirements:
' 1. Factory-mixed formulation designed for adhesive attachment of insulation to
substrates of type indicated, as approved by system manufacturer.
' E. Molded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid cellular thermal insulation formed by the
expansion of polystyrene resin beads or granules in a closed mold to comply with
' ASTM C 578 for Type I, approved by system manufacturer for material qualities
including corner squareness, other dimensional tolerances and the following:
' 1. Age insulation in block form prior to cutting and shipping by air drying for not
less than 6 weeks or by another method approved by system manufacturer that
produces equivalent results.
'
2. Provide insulation in boards not less than 2 feet by 4 feet and in thickness
indicated but not less than that allowed by system manufacturer.
rcin a ric: Balanced alkali-resistant o en weave lass fiber fabric treated for
F. Remfo g F b p g
compatibility with other system materials; made from continuous multiend strands
' with tensile strength of not less than 145 lb and 150 lb in warp and fill directions per
ASTM D 1682; complying with ASTM D 578 and the following requirements for
' minimum weight:
1. Standard Reinforcing Fabric: 4.2 oz. per sq. yd.
' 2. Strip Reinforcing Fabric: 3.75 oz. per sq. yd.
3. Impact resistant reinforcing mesh -not less than 15 oz./yd. (@ bottom 4'-0" of
column enclosures only).
' ,
'
of
s standard, job-mixed formulation
G. Base Coat Materials: System manufacturer
portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, white or natural color; and
' system manufacturer's standard polymer-based adhesive designed for use indicated.
Use impact strength base coat to 4'-0" high on column enclosures only.
' H. Finish Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture complying with the
following requirements for material composition and method of combining materials:
' 1. Factory-mixed formulation of polymer emulsion admixture, colorfast mineral
pigments, sound stone particles, and fillers.
i
a. Particle Size: 0.05 inch.
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FIl~tISH SYSTEMS -CLASS PB
07241 - 5
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' I. Water: Clean and potable.
2.3 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
' A. Sealant Products: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric
sealant that is compatible with joint fillers, joint substrates, and other related materials
' and complies with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" for products
corresponding to description indicated below.
' L Multipart Nonsag Urethane Sealant.
B. Sealant Color: Comply with the following requirement:
' 1. Match finish coat color of system.
' 2.4 MIXING
' A. General: Comply with system manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing
materials. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as approved
by system manufacturer. Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials within time
period specified by system manufacturer or discard.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
' 3.1 EXAMINATION
' A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, to determine if they are in satisfactory
condition for installation of system. Do not proceed with installation of system until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
' 3.2 PREPARATION
' A. Protect contiguous -work from moisture deterioration and soiling resulting from
application of systems. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to
' prevent spattering of exterior finish coatings on other work.
B. Protect system, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather
' during installation. Prevent infiltration of moisture behind system and deterioration of
substrates.
' C. Substrate Preparation: Prepare and clean substrates to comply with system
manufacturer's requirements to obtain optimum bond between substrate and adhesive
for insulation.
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS -CLASS PB 07241 - 6
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1. Apply surface sealer over substrates where required by system manufacturer for
improving adhesion.
2. Apply surface sealer over gypsum sheathing substrates where required by
system manufacturer to protect sheathing from premature degradation.
' 3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with system manufacturer's current published instructions for
installation of system as applicable to each type of substrate indicated.
B. Adhesively attach insulation to comply with the following requirements:
' 1. A 1 adhesive to insulation by notched trowel method in manner that results in
PP Y
adhesive coating entire surface of gypsum sheathing once insulation is adhered
to sheathing, unless system manufacturer instructions specify use of surface
sealer in combination with ribbon and dab method.
' 2. Allow adhered insulation to remain undisturbed for period prescribed by system
manufacturer but not less than 24 hours, prior to beginning rasping and sanding
' insulation or application of base coat and reinforcing fabric.
3. Apply insulation boards over dry substrates in courses with long edges oriented
' horizontally; begin first course from a level base line and work upwards.
4. Stagger vertical joints in successive courses to produce running bond pattern.
a. Offset joints of insulation from joints in sheathing.
5. Interlock ends at internal and external corners.
' 6. Abut boards tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush,
continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between insulation
boards. If gaps occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert without
' use of adhesive.
7. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting
' more than 1/32 inch from surface of insulation and yellowed areas due to sun
exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch.
' 8. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, .and projections precisely and to produce
edges and shapes conforming to details indicated.
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FI1~tISH SYSTEMS -CLASS PB 07241 - 7
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' 9. Interrupt insulation where expansion joints are indicated in substrates behind
exterior insulation and finish systems.
' 10. Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps of width needed between
adjoining insulation edges as well as between insulation edges and dissimilar
adjoining surfaces projecting through insulation that produce joint widths
' indicated after encapsulation of joint substrates with base coat, reinforcing
fabric, and finish coat.
11. Cut grooves, rabbets, and other features in outside face of insulation with
high-speed router. and bit configured,. to produce grooves, rabbets, and other
features that conform accurately to profiles and locations indicated. Do not
' reduce insulation thickness at features to less than 3/4 inch.
' 12. Treat exposed edges of insulation board, including those forming substrates of
sealed joints within system or between system and other work, by encapsulating
with base coat, reinforcing fabric, and finish coat.
' 13. Coordinate flashing installation with installation of insulation to produce a wall
system that does not allow water to penetrate behind protective coating.
C. Apply base coat to exposed surfaces of insulation in minimum thickness specified by
system manufacturer.
D. Fully embed reinforcing fabric of type indicated below in wet base coat to produce
wrinkle-free installation with fabric continuous at corners and lapped or otherwise
treated at joints to comply with system manufacturer's requirements.
1. Standard reinforcing fabric unless otherwise indicated.
' E. Double La er A lication: Where indicated a 1 a second base coat and second
Y Pp ~ pp Y
' layer of reinforcing fabric of weight indicated below, in same .manner as first
application. Do not apply until first base coat has cured.
' 1. Standard reinforcing fabric.
2. Located at enclosures of canopy columns up to soffit level.
' F. Apply finish coat over dry base coat in thickness required by system manufacturer to
produce a uniform finish of texture and color matching approved sample.
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS -CLASS PB 07241 - 8
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
3.4 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with
applicable requirements of Division 7 section "Joint Sealers" and with "ETNA Joint
Sealant Specifications for Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems."
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove
protective coatings from window and door frames and any other surfaces outside areas
indicated to receive protective coating.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer
and system manufacturer that ensures system's being without damage or deterioration
at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 07241
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS -CLASS PB 07241 - 9
PHASE II
JOHNSON CREEK OUTLET CENTER
JOHNSON CREEK, WISCONSIN
SECTION 07411 -METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to this Section.
1.2 SLTfvIMARY
A. This Section includes metal wall panels of the following type:
1. Parapet wall panels with concealed fasteners.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Division 5 Sections for structural and light gage framing.
2. Division 6 Sections for plywood sheathing.
3. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for roof flashing and other sheet
metal work.
4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants.
C. Wood framing and decking are specified in a Division 6 Section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data including manufacturer's product specifications, standard details, certified
product test results, installation instructions, and general recommendations, as
applicable to materials and finishes for each component and for total panel system.
C. Samples for verification purposes of wall panels. Provide sample panels 12 inches
long by actual panel width, in the profile, style, color, and texture indicated. Include
clips, battens, fasteners, closures, and other panel accessories.
METAL WALL PANELS 07411 - 1
PHASE II
JOHNSON CREEK OUTLET CENTER
' JOHNSON CREEK, WISCONSIN
D. Shop drawings showing layouts of panels on roofs, details of edge conditions, joints,
panel profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details.
Distinguish between factory and field assembly work.
' 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
' A. Field Measurements: Where possible, prior to fabrication of panels, take field
measurements of structure or substrates to receive panel system. Allow for trimming
panel.. units where final dimensions cannot be established prior to fabrication.
' Structural uniform load capacity shall be determined in accordance with the principles
of ASTM E-330.
' 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver panels and other components so they will not be damaged or deformed.
' Package roof panels for protection against transportation damage.
B. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting roof covering panels to
prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable
weathertight ventilated covering. Store metal wall panels so that they will not
accumulate water. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause
staining, denting, or other surface damage.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Finish Warranty: Furnish panel manufacturer's written warranty covering failure of
the factory-applied exterior finish on metal wall panels within the warranty period.
This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may
have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.
' 1. Warranty period for factory-applied exterior finishes on wall panels is 20 years
after the date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide panels by the
' following:
1. Steel Wall Panels:
METAL WALL PANELS 07411 - 2
' PHASE II
JOHNSON CREEK OUTLET CENTER
' JOHNSON CREEK, WISCONSIN
a. Binkley Building Products. DBFA.
' b. Steelite, Inc. CFP 111-1.
2.2 SHEET MATERIALS
t A. Commercial ualit Galvanized Steel Sheet: Com 1 with ASTM A 526 with G90
Q Y pY
coating complying with ASTM A 525.
2.3 METAL FINISHES
A. General: Apply coatings either before or after forming and fabricating panels, as
required by coating process and as required for maximum coating performance
' capability. Protect coating either by application of strippable film or by packing
plastic film or other suitable material between panels in a manner to properly protect
the finish. Furnish air-drying spray finish in matching color for touch-up.
1. Color: Standard color as selected by Architect.
B. Fluoropolymer Coating: Manufacturer's standard two-coat, thermo-cured, full-strength
70 percent "Kynar 500" coating consisting of a primer and a minimum 0.75-mil dry
film thickness with a total minimum dry film thickness of 0.9 mil and 30 percent
t reflective gloss when tested in accordance with ASTM D 523.
' 1. Durability: Provide coating that has been field tested under normal range of
weathering conditions for minimum of 20 years without significant peel, blister,
flake, chip, crack, or check in finish; without chalking in excess of No. 8 in
' accordance with ASTM D 659; and without fading in excess of 5 NBS units.
2.4 PANEL FABRICATION
' A. General: Fabricate and finish panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent
possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as required to fulfill
' indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with
indicated profiles and dimensional requirements and with structural requirements.
B. Apply bituminous coating or other permanent separation materials on concealed panel
surfaces where panels would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate materials
that are noncompatible or could result in corrosion or deterioration of either material or
finishes.
C. Fabricate panel joints with captive gaskets or separator strips, which provide a tight
seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact in a manner that will minimize noise from
movements within panel system.
METAL WALL PANELS 07411 - 3
u
u
n
0
n
0
PHASE II
JOHNSON CREEK OUTLET CENTER
JOHNSON CREEK, WISCONSIN
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PANEL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Purlin, angles, channels, and other secondary structural panel support members and
anchorage shall be installed in accordance with AISC Manual of Steel Construction
"Code of Standard Practice."
3.2 PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations for
installation, as applicable to project conditions and supporting substrates. Anchor
panels and other components of the work securely in place, with provisions for thermal
and structural movement.
1. Field cutting of exterior panels by torch is not permitted.
2. Install panels with concealed fasteners.
B. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where
required for weatherproof performance of panel systems. Provide types of gaskets,
sealants, and fillers indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, types recommended by
panel manufacturer.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Damaged Units: Replace panels and other components of the work that have been
damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by means of finish touch-up or
similar minor repair procedures.
B. Cleaning: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films (if any) as
soon as each panel is installed. Upon completion of panel installation, clean finished
surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer, and maintain in a clean condition
during construction.
END OF SECTION 07411
METAL WALL PANELS
07411 - 4
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 07412 -MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Standing-seam roof panels.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for metal framing.
2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and sheathing.
3. Division 7 Section "Manufactured Wall Panels" for preformed metal wall panels.
4. Division 7 .Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing not part of
roofing and other sheet metal work.
5. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's product specifications, standard details, certified
product test results, and general recommendations, as applicable to materials and
finishes for each component and for total panel assemblies.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of panels on roofs, details of edge conditions, joints,
panel profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, flashings, underlayment, closures, snow
guards, and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include
structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 07412 - 1
PHASEI
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
C. Samples for Verification: Provide sample panels 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual
panel width, in the profile, style, color, and texture indicated. Include clips, caps,
battens, fasteners, closures, and other exposed panel accessories.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article
to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects
with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and
other information specified.
' E. Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of manufactured. roof panel assemblies and
materials with performance and other requirements based on comprehensive testing of
current products.
' 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed metal roof
panel projects similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project
and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Professional En ineer ualifications: A rofessional en ineer who is le all ualified
g Q P g g Yq
to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced in
providing engineering services of the kind indicated.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work, as documented
according to ASTM E 699.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-resistance-rated roof panel assemblies
are indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested
for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
' 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by design designations in UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory" or in the listing of another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
' T RA E AND HANDLING
1.5 DELIVERY, S O G ,
A. Deliver panels and other components so they will not be damaged or deformed.
Package panels for protection against damage during transportation or handling.
' B. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting roof panels to prevent
bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 07412 - 2
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable
weathertight and ventilated covering. Store panels to ensure dryness. Do not store
panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other
surface damage.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify location of structural members and openings in substrates
by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Finish Warranty: Submit a written warranty, signed by manufacturer, covering failure
of the factory-applied exterior finish on metal roof panels within the specified warranty
period and agreeing to repair finish or replace roof panels that show evidence of finish
deterioration. Deterioration of finish includes, but is not limited to, color fade,
chalking, cracking, peeling, and loss of film integrity.
B. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering metal panels that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Steel Roof Panels:
a. AEP-Span.
b. Berridge Manufacturing Co.
c. Copper Sales, Inc.
d. Perma-Clad Products, Inc.
e. Smith Steelite, Inc.
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 07412 - 3
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
2.2 METALS AND FII~TISHES
' A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Pre ainted with Coil Coatin Steel sheet metallic coated
P g
by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with
ASTM A 755 (ASTM A 755M) and the following requirements:
' 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 (ASTM A 653M, Z275); structural
quality.
2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Class AZ-50 coating,
Grade 40 (ASTM A 792M, Class AZ-150 coating, Grade 275); structural quality.
3. Aluminum-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 463, T1-40 (ASTM A 463M, T1-120)
coating.
' 4. Finish: Apply the following organic coating in thickness indicated. Furnish
appropriate air-drying spray finish in matching color for touchup.
a. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat,
thermocured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and
' fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent
polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight with a total minimum dry film
thickness of 0.9 mil (0.023 mm) and 30 percent reflective gloss when tested
according to ASTM D 523.
1) Durability: Provide coating field tested under .normal range of
weather conditions for a minimum of 20 years without significant
peel, blister, flake, chip, crack, or check in finish; without chalking in
excess of a chalk rating of 8 according to ASTM D 4214; and without
' fading in excess of 5 Hunter units.
2) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
' colors. Premium color shall be selected.
' 2.3 ROOF PANEL ASSEMBLIES
A. Standing-Seam Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard factory-formed, standing-seam
' roof panel assembly designed for concealed mechanical attachment of panels to roof
purlins or deck.
' 1. Clips: Provide minimum 0.0625-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, stainless-steel panel clips
designed to meet negative-load requirements.
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 07412 - 4
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
2. Cleats: Mechanically seamed cleats formed from minimum 0.0250-inch- (0.65-
mm-) thick, stainless-steel or nylon-coated aluminum sheets.
2.4 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Fabric Underlayment: Manufacturer's standard nonwoven polyester fabric marketed for
use in cold-applied, single-ply roofing weighing 6.0 oz./sq. yd. (200 g/sq. m), white,
nonswelling, rot and mildew resistant.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "E6N Rufon Fabric"
by Amoco Fabric and Fiber Co.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. WinterGuard; CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Bituthene Ice and Water Shield; Grace: W.R. Grace & Co.
c. Moisture Guard; Tamko Asphalt Products, Inc.
d. Weather Watch; GAF Building Materials Corporation.
e. Ice Guard Membrane No. 108-AG; Royston Laboratories, Inc.
B. Building Paper: Minimum 5 lb/100 sq. ft. (2.4 kg/sq. m), rosin sized.
C. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and accessories required for a complete roof panel assembly
and as recommended by panel manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Laminated Backer Board: Hardboard that complies with ANSI A135.4, Class 1
tempered, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Thermal Spacers: Where panels attach directly to purlins, provide thermal spacers
recommended by panel manufacturer.
D. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded
studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 07412 - 5
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1. Use stainless-steel fasteners for exterior applications and galvanized steel
fasteners for interior applications.
' E. Accessories: Unless otherwise specified, provide components required for a complete
roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, ridge
closures, clips,. seam covers, battens, flashings, gutters, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure
' strips, and similar items. Match materials and finishes of panels.
1. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, self-extinguishing, expanded, cellular, rubber or
cross-linked, polyolefin-foam flexible closure strips. Cut or premold to match
configuration of panels. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to
ensure weathertight construction.
' 2. Sealin Ta e: Pressure-sensitive, 100 ercent solids, polyisobutylene compound
g p p
sealing tape with release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag,
nontoxic, nonstaining tape.
3. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, of base polymer, type, grade, class, and
use classifications required to seal joints in panel roofing and remain weathertight.
Provide sealant recommended by panel manufacturer.
' F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-
mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat, unless otherwise indicated. Provide inert-type
' noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other
deleterious impurities.
G. Expansion-Joint Sealant: For hooked-type expansion joints that must be free to move,
provide nonsetting, nonhardening, nonmigrating, heavy-bodied polyisobutylene sealant.
' H. Snow Guards: Prefabricated, noncorrosive units designed to use with roof panels and
complete with predrilled holes or hooks for anchoring.
' 2.6 FABRICATION
' A. General: Fabricate and finish panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent
possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill
indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with
' indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B. Sound Control: Where sound-absorption requirement is indicated, fabricate interior
' liner panels with 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) diameter holes uniformly spaced approximately
1000 holes per square foot (10 750 holes per square meter). Cover insulation with
polyethylene film and provide inserts of wire mesh to form acoustical spacer grid.
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 07412 - 6
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
C. Fabricate panel joints with captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal
' and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will minimize noise from
movements within panel assembly.
' 2.7 PANEL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
' A. Secondary Framing: Provide components complying with the Light Gage Structural
Institute's "Guide Specifications," Section 07410, "Manufactured Roof and Wall
Panels."
' 1. Roof Purlins: C- or Z-shaped sections fabricated from 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-)
thick, shop-painted, roll-formed steel. Purlin spacers fabricated from 0.079-inch-
' (2.0-mm-) thick, cold-formed, galvanized steel sections.
2. Eave Struts: Unequal flange, C-shaped sections formed to provide adequate back-
' up for roof panels. Fabricate from 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, shop-painted,
roll-formed steel.
' 3. Flange and Sag Bracing: 1-5/8-by-1-5/8-inch (41-by-4l-mm) angles, fabricated
from 0.059$-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, shop-painted, roll-formed steel.
' 4. Base or Sill Angles: Fabricate from 0.079-inch- (2.0-mm-) thick, cold-formed,
galvanized steel sections.
' S. Secondary structural members, except columns and beams, shall be
manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from 0.079-inch- (2.0-mm-) thick,
' cold-formed galvanized steel.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
' 3.1 E~S:AMINATION
' A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements indicated for conditions affecting performance of metal panel roofing.
' 1. Panel Supports and Anchorage: Examine roof framing to verify that purlins,
angles, channels, and other secondary structural panel support members and
' anchorage have been installed according to written instructions of panel
manufacturer.
2. Do not proceed with roof panel installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 07412 - 7
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
3.2 PREPARATION
' A. Coordinate metal panel roofing with rain drainage work; flashing; trim; and
construction of decks, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof,
secure, and noncorrosive installation.
B. Promptly remove protective film, if any, from exposed surfaces of metal panels. Strip
' with care to avoid damage to finish.
' C. Secondary Structural. Supports: Install purlins, bracing, and other secondary structural
panel support members and anchorage according to the Light Gage Structural Institute's
"Guide Specifications," Section 07410, "Manufactured Roof and Wall Panels."
3.3 PANEL INSTALLATION
' A. General: Comply with panel manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations
for installation, as applicable to project conditions and supporting substrates. Anchor
panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal
and structural movement.
1. Field cutting exterior panels by torch is not permitted.
' 2. Install anels with concealed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
p
3. Install panels over solid substrate with minimum 3:12 (1:4) slope. Install 1 ply of
felt from lower edge up, with at least 3-inch (75-mm) side laps and 4-inch (100-
' mm) end laps.
B. Accessories: Install components required for a complete roof panel assembly including
' trim, copings, fasciae, ridge closures, clips, seam covers, battens, flashings, gutters,
sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
7
u
u
C. Separate dissimilar metals by painting each metal surface in area of contact with a
bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each metal surface,
or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar
metals.
D. Install felt underlayment and building-paper slip sheet on roof deck under metal panels,
unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer. Use adhesive for temporary
anchorage, where possible, to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under metal panels.
Apply from eave to ridge in shingle fashion and lap joints a minimum of 2 inches (50
mm).
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 07412 - 8
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
E. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where
' required for weatherproof performance of panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets,
fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, types recommended by
' panel manufacturer.
1. Install weatherseal under edge cap. Flash and seal panels at eave and rake with
' rubber, neoprene, or other closures to exclude weather.
2. Seal panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal
side joints where recommended by panel manufacturer.
' 3. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants."
G. Standing-Seam Roof Panel Assembly: Fasten panels to supports with concealed clip
according to panel manufacturer's written instructions.
' 1. Install clips at each support with self-drilling/self-tapping fasteners.
2. At end laps of panels, install tape calk between panels.
3. Install factory-calked cleats at standing-seam joints. Apply snap-on batten to
panels to provide a weathertight joint.
4. Seaming: Complete seaming of panel joints by operating portable power-driven
equipment of type recommended by panel manufacturer to provide a weathertight
' joint.
' H. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4
inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-
inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
' 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
_i
ii
A. Damaged Units: Replace panels and other components of the Work that have been
damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar
minor repair procedures.
B. Cleaning: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as soon
as each panel is installed. On completion of panel installation, clean finished surfaces
as recommended by panel manufacturer and maintain in a clean condition during
construction.
END OF SECTION 07411
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 07412 - 9
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 07530 -SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes single-ply membrane roofing systems.
B. Types of roofing systems specified in this section utilizing single ply roofing membranes
include the following:
1. Loosely laid and ballasted system.
C. Single ply roofing membranes include the following:
1. Ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM)
D. Roof insulation related to flexible sheet roofing is specified in this section.
E. Wood nailers, blocking, and other related items are specified in Division 6.
F. Similar membranes concealed by a wearing surface are excluded by definition and, if
required, are specified elsewhere in Division 7 as waterproofmg.
G. This Section includes installation of roof hatches specified elsewhere in Division 7.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division
1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data, installation instructions, and general recommendations from manufacturer
of single ply membrane system for types of roofing required. Include data substantiating
that materials comply with requirements.
C. Shop drawings showing roof configuration, sheet layout, seam locations, colors (as
applicable), details at perimeter, and special conditions.
D. Test data for pullout resistance of fastening systems.
SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530 - 1
J
' 1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
A. Manufacturer: Obtain primary flexible sheet roofing from a single manufacturer.
Provide secondary materials as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
B. Installer: Engage an experienced Installer to apply single ply membrane roofing who has
specialized in application of roofing systems similar to those required for this project.
Installer must be acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer of primary roofing material.
' 1. Work associated with single ply membrane roofing, including (but not limited to)
insulation, flashing and counterflashing,,expansionfoints, and joint sealers, is to be
performed by Installer of this work.
'
C. Pre-Roofing Conference: Prior to installation of roofing and associated work, meet at
project site, or other mutually agreed location, with Installer, roofing sheet manufacturer,
' installers of related work, and other entities concerned with roofing performance,
including (where applicable) Owner's insurer, test agencies, governing authorities,
Architect, and Owner. Record discussions and agreements and furnish copy to each
participant. Provide at least 72 hours' advance notice to participants prior to convening
pre-roofing conference.
' D. UL Listing: Provide labeled materials that have been tested and listed by UL in
"Building Materials Directory" or by other nationally recognized testing laboratory for
' application indicated, with "Class A" rated materials/system for roof slopes shown.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
'
A. Weather: Proceed with roofin work when existin and forecasted weather conditions
g g
permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and
' warranty requirements.
B. Substrate Conditions: Do not begin roofing installation until substrates have been
inspected and are determined to be in satisfactory condition.
' 1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit executed copy of single ply membrane manufacturer's
"Limited Service Warranty" agreement including flashing endorsement, signed by an
' authorized representative of manufacturer. Provide form that was published with
product literature as of date of Contract Documents, for the following period of time:
1. 10 years after date of Substantial Completion.
fl
SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530 - 2
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A. Performance: Provide roofing materials recognized to be of generic type indicated and
tested to show compliance with indicated performances, or provide other similar
materials certified in writing by manufacturer to be equal to, or better than, materials
specified in every significant respect, and acceptable to Architect.
B. Compatibility: Provide products that are recommended by manufacturers to be fully
compatible with indicated substrates, or provide separation materials as required to
eliminate contact between incompatible materials.
2.2
EPDM MEMBRANE
A. General: Ethylene propylene diene monomers formed into uniform, flexible sheets,
complying with ASTM D 4637, Type 1.
1. Class U, Unreinforced.
2. Thickness: 45 mils, nominal.
3. Exposed Face Color: Black.
4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of
one of the following:
a. Carlisle Syntec Systems
b. Firestone Building Products Co.
c. Goodyear Tire & Rubber Co.
d. Manville Building Materials Corp.
2.3
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Sheet Seaming System: Manufacturer's standard materials for sealing lapped joints,
including edge sealer to cover exposed spliced edges as recommended by membrane
manufacturer.
B. Cant Strips, Tapered Edge Strips, and Flashing Accessories: Types recommended by
membrane manufacturer, including adhesive tapes, flashing cements, and sealants.
C. Flashing Material: Manufacturer's standard system compatible with flexible sheet
membrane.
SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530 - 3
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
D. Slip Sheet: Type recommended by membrane manufacturer for protecting. membrane
from incompatible substrates.
E. Mechanical Fasteners: Metal plates, caps, battens, accessory components, fastening
devices, and adhesives to suit substrate and as recommended by membrane
manufacturer.
F. Aggregate Surface Ballast: Washed, rounded, river bed gravel range from 1 to 2
inches in diameter. Provide aggregate that will withstand weather exposure without
significant deterioration and will not contribute to membrane degradation.
G. .Molded Walkway Pads: Black molded rubber walkway pads with slip resistant.
' surface and factory rounded corners, adhered to roof membrane. Pads to be 30" x 30"
x 3/16". Pads to be located around and connected between all rooftop HVAC units.
2.4 INSULATING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide insulating materials to comply with requirements indicated for
' materials and compliance with referenced standards in sizes to fit applications
indicated, selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.
1. Provide tapered boards where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate with taper
of 1/4 inch per foot, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Polyisocyanurate Board Roof Insulation: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation with
polyisocyanurate closed-cell foam core and manufacturer's standard facing laminated
to both sides; complying with FS HH-I-1972/2, Class 1. Minimum R. Value = 20.0.
2.5 AUXILIARY INSULATION MATERIALS
' A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer and
complying with fire resistance requirements.
B. Mastic Sealer: T e recommended b insulation manufacturer for bonding edge joints
Yp Y
and filling voids.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE
1 A. General: Comply with manufacturers' instructions for preparation of substrate to
receive single ply membrane system.
SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530 - 4
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1. Verify that penetrations, expansion joints, and blocking are in placed and
t secured and that roof drains are properly clamped into position.
B. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to FSR system work.
Remove sharp projections.
C. Install flashings and accessory items as shown, and as recommended by manufacturer
if not shown.
' 3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. General: Extend insulation full thickness in two layers, or in multiple layers over
' entire surface to be insulated, cutting and fitting tightly around obstructions. Form
cant strips, crickets, saddles, and tapered areas with additional material as shown and
as required for proper drainage of membrane.
1. Stagger joints in one direction for each course. For multiple layers, stagger
joints in both directions between courses with no gaps, to form a complete
thermal envelope.
B. Do not install more insulation each day than can be covered with membrane before end
of day or before start of inclement weather.
' C. Secure roof insulation to substrate with mechanical anchors of type and spacing
indicated but in no case provide less than one anchor per 4 square feet of surface area
or less anchorage than required by FM "Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28."
3.3 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Loose-Laid Ballasted: .Install membrane by unrolling over prepared substrate,
fastening at perimeter and at roofing penetrations. Lap adjoining sheets and bond,
covering top edges of each sheet at seams with uniform fillet of sealant as
1 recommended by manufacturer. Install flashings and counterflashings as shown and as
recommended by manufacturer.
1. Apply aggregate ballast in uniform thickness at rate of 10 to 12 psf, spreading
with care to minimize possibility of damage to membrane.
' 3.4 PROTECTION OF ROOFING
' A. Upon completion of roofing (including associated work), institute appropriate
procedures for surveillance and protection of roofing during remainder of construction
period. At end of construction period, or at a time when remaining construction will in
SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530 - 5
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
no way affect or endanger roofing, make a final inspection of roofing and prepare a
written report to Owner, describing nature and extent of deterioration or damage
found.
B. Repair or replace (as required) deteriorated or defective work found at time of final
inspection to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial.
Completion and in accordance with requirements of specified warranty.
END OF SECTION 07530
SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530 - 6
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 07700 -ROOF HATCHES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to work of
this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent and locations of roof accessories is indicated on the drawings and by provisions
of this section.
B. Types of units specified in this section include the following:
1. Roof hatches.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data; Roof Accessories: Submit manufacturer's technical product data,
rough-in diagrams, details, installation instructions and general product
recommendations.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for
fabrication of units, including flanges and cap- flashing to coordinate with type of
roofing indicated. Comply with "NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" details
for installation of units.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide manufacturers' standard units, modified as necessary to comply with
requirements. Shop fabricate each unit to greatest extent possible.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Zinc-Coated Steel: Commercial quality with 0.20 percent copper, ASTM A 525, G90
hot-dip galvanized, mill phosphatized.
ROOF HATCHES 07700 - 1
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
B. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semi-rigid board of glass fiber of
' thicknesses indicated.
' C. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with water-borne preservatives for
above-
round use
com
l
in
with AWPB LP-2; not less than 1-1/2" thick
,
p
y
g
.
g
D. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or
other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed
fasteners with finish of material being fastened.
E. Gaskets: Tubular or fingered design of neoprene or polyvinyl chloride, or block
design of sponge neoprene.
F. Bituminous Coating: FS TT-C-494A or SSPC-Paint 12, solvent type bituminous
mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per
' coating.
' G. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying,
nonmigrating sealant
.
' H. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit manufacturer, which is
compatible with joint surfaces; comply with FS TT-S-00227E, TT-S-00230C, or
TT-S-001543A.
'
I. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822, asphaltic.
I 2.3 PREFABRICATED ROOF HATCHES
A. General: Fabricate units of sizes shown, single-leaf type unless otherwise indicated,
' for 40 lbs. per sq. ft. external loading and 20 lbs. per sq. ft. internal loading pressure.
Frame with 12" high integral-curb double-wall construction with 1" insulation, cant
strips and cap flashing (roofing counter-flashing), with welded or sealed mechanical
' corner joints. Provide double-wall cover (lid) construction with 1" insulation core.
Equip units with complete hardware set including hold-open devices, interior padlock
hasps, and both interior and exterior latch handles. Provide gasketing. Fabricate units
of following materials:
' 1. Materials: Zinc-coated steel sheets.
B. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1/4" per ft., fabricate hatch curbs
with height tapered to match slope, to result in level installation of tops of units.
ROOF HATCHES 07700 - 2
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide prefabricated roof
' hatch units by one of the following:
' 1. Bilco Co.; New Haven, CT
2. Dur-Red Products; Cudahy, CA
3. Milcor, Inc.; Lima, OH
PART 3 -EXECUTION
' 3.1
II
~~
INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Coordinate
with installation of roof deck and other substrates to receive accessory units, and vapor
barriers, roof insulation, roofing and flashing; as required to ensure that. each element
of the work performs properly, and that combined elements are waterproof and
weathertight. Anchor units securely to supporting structural substrates, adequate to
withstand lateral and thermal stresses as well as inward and outward loading pressures.
B. Isolation: Where metal surfaces of units are to be installed in contact with
noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, apply bituminous
coating on concealed metal surfaces, or provide other permanent separation.
C. Flange Seals: Except as otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick
bed of roofing cement, to form a seal.
D. Cap Flashing: Where cap flashing is required as component of accessory, install to
provide adequate waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing (as
counter-flashing). Seal with thick bead of mastic sealant, except where overlap is
indicated to be left open for ventilation.
END OF SECTION 07700
ROOF HATCHES 07700 - 3
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 07901 -JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations:
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces as indicated
below:
a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
b. Joints between different materials.
c. Perimeter joints between materials and frames of doors and windows.
d. Other joints as indicated.
2. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below:
a. Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Joints between different materials.
c. Other joints as indicated.
3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated
below:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls:
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
c. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors.
d. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures.
e. Other joints as indicated.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Division 7 Section "Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems -Class PM" for
sealing system joints.
2. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for sealing joints related to flashing
and sheet metal for roofing.
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 1
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
3. Division 8 "Glass and Glazing" for sealants used in glazing.
' 4. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Panels" for sealin ed e moldin s at erimeter of
g g g p
' acoustical ceilings.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
' A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and
to maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or
deterioration of joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that have been produced and installed to
' establish and maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no
staining or deterioration of joint substrates.
1 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data. from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required.
1. Certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants .plus the primers and
cleaners required for sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling
use of volatile organic compounds.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint
' sealant applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project
that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
r
B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials
from a single manufacturer for each different product required.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use,
pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
JOINT SEALANTS
07901 - 2
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
B. Store and. handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to
prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures,
contaminants, or other causes.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the
following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits
permitted by joint sealant manufacturer.
2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits
permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).
3. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint
widths are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated.
C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until
contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint
substrates.
2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE
Designation Joint Sealers
Description of Joint Construction
and Location where Sealant 'is
applied.
ES1 Multi-Part Pourable Urethane Sealant
Exterior and interior joints in
horizontal surfaces of concrete;
between metal and concrete, mortar,
stone, and masonry.
ES2 One-Part Neutral Cure Silicone Sealant Exterior and interior joints in vertical
surfaces of concrete and masonry;
between concrete masonry and stone;
between metal and concrete, mortar,
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 3
ES3 One-Part Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
or stone; interior and exterior
perimeter joints of metal frames in
exterior walls; exterior overhead
joints.
Exposed joints within glazed curtain
wall framing systems, skylight
framing systems, and aluminum
entrance framing systems.
ES4 One-Part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant Interior joints in vertical surfaces of
ceramic the in toilet rooms, showers,
and kitchens.
LS Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant Interior joints in field-painted
vertical and overhead surfaces at
perimeter of elevator door frames
and hollow metal door frames; in
gypsum drywall, plaster, concrete,
and concrete masonry and all other
interior joints not indicated
otherwise.
2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT: ES1
A. Base Polymer: Urethane.
B. Type: M (multicomponent).
C. Grade: P (pourable).
D. Class: 25
E. Use(s) Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic).
F. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A and as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, O.
1. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodized .aluminum, aluminum
coated with ahigh-performance coating, galvanized steel, brick, granite,
limestone, marble, ceramic tile, and wood.
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 4
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
G. Available Products:
1. Mameco International, Inc. - Vulken 922.
2. Pecora Corp. - Dynatred.
3. Sonneborn Building Products Div. -Sonolastic SL-2.
4. Sika Corp. - Sikaflex - 2CSL.
2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT: ES2
A. Base Polymer: Neutral-curing silicone.
B. Type: S (single component).
C. Grade: NS (nonsag).
D. Class: 25.
E. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
F. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A and as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, O.
1. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodized aluminum, aluminum
coated with ahigh-performance coating, galvanized steel, brick, granite,
limestone, marble, ceramic tile, and wood.
G. Available Products:
1. Dow Corning Corp. - 795.
2. Pecora Corp. - 895. '
3. Sonneborn Building Products Div. -Sonolastic Omniseal.
4. Tremco, Inc. -Spectrum 2.
2.4 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT: ES3
A. Base Polymer: Acid-curing silicone.
B. Type: S (single component).
C. Grade: NS (nonsag).
D. Class: 25.
JOINT SEALANTS
07901 - 5
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
E. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
F. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A and as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, O.
1. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodized aluminum, aluminum
coated with ahigh-performance coating, galvanized steel, brick, granite,
limestone, marble, ceramic tile, and wood.
G. Available Products:
1. Dow Corning Corp. - 999-A. _
2. Pecora Corp. - 863.
3. Sonneborn Building Products Div. - Sonolastic Omniplus.
2.5 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT: ES4
A. Base Polymer: Acid-curing silicone.
B. Type: S (single component).
C. Grade: NS (nonsag).
D. Class: 25.
E. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
F. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and as applicable to joint substrates indicated,
O.
1. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodized aluminum, aluminum
coated with ahigh-performance coating, galvanized steel, brick, granite,
limestone, marble, ceramic tile, and wood.
G. Available Products:
1. Dow Corning Corp. - 786 Mildew Resistant.
2.6 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant,
paintable latex sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed
applications on interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 6
'
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
indicated percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation without
' failing either adhesively or cohesively.
' B. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 that
accommodates joint movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and
compression for a total of 10 percent.
' C. Silicone Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 and, except
for weight loss measured per ASTM C 792, with ASTM C 920 that accommodates
' joint movement of not more than 25 percent in both extension and compression for a
total of 50 percent.
' D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant:
' a. "AC-20," Pecora Co
rp.
b. "Sonolac," Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc.
' c. "Tremco Acrylic Latex 834," Tremco, Inc.
2. Silicone-Emulsion Sealant:
a. "Trade Mate Paintable Glazing Sealant," Dow Corning Corp.
' 2.7 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
' A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are
compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are
approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience
' and laboratory testing.
B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining,
' nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below
and of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to
' producing. optimum sealant performance:
1. Open-cell polyurethane foam.
' 2. Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas,
nonoutgassing in unruptured state.
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 7
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
3. Proprietary, reticulated, closed-cell polymeric foam, nonoutgassing, with a
' density of 2.5 pcf and tensile strength of 35 psi per ASTM D 1623, and with
water absorption less than 0.02 gms/cc per ASTM C 1083.
' 4. Any material indicated above.
C. Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing
complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, capable of remaining
resilient at temperatures down to -26 deg F (-32 deg C). Provide products with low
compression set .and of size and shape to provide a secondary. seal, to control sealant
depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.
' D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by
sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint
filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in
' sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where. applicable.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
' A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for
adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated; as determined from preconstruction
' joint sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
' B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of
sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable
of staining or harming in any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces,
' and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
' surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
' 3.1 EXAMINATION
' A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other
' conditions affecting joint sealant performance. Do not proceed with installation of
joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
u
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 8
u
3.2
0
fl
0
PREPARATION
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint
sealants to comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the
following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with
adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent,
protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility
by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water
repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous
joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical
abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate
capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose
particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing
out joints with oil-free compressed air.
3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other
nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,
harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint
sealant manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's
recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint .sealant bond; do not allow
spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
' C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such
contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape
' immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
' 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions
' applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent
requirements apply.
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 9
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
B. Elastomeric Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of
' ASTM C 962 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and
conditions indicated.
' C. Latex Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 90 for use
of latex sealants.
' D. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following
requirements:
' 1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during
application and at position. required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and
' depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant
movement capability.
' a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.
b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers.
' '
oint fillers that have become wet rior to sealant
c. Remove absorbent
J P
application and replace with dry material.
2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods .are not used
between sealants and joint fillers or back of joints.
E. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants
directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses
provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes
and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
' Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time
' skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of
configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of
sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
' Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not
approved by sealant manufacturer.
' 1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure SA in ASTM C 62, unless.
otherwise indicated.
2. Provide flush joint configuration, per Figure SB in ASTM C 962, where
indicated.
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 10
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.
3. Provide recessed joint configuration, per Figure SC in ASTM C 962, of recess
depth and at locations indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants. and
of products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,
despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged
or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that and installations with repaired areas
are indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION 07901
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 11
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 08111 -STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following products manufactured in accordance with SDI
Recommended Standards:
1. Doors: Flush, hollow or composite construction standard steel doors for interior
and exterior locations.
2. Frames: Pressed steel frames for doors and other interior and exterior openings of
following type:
a. Welded unit type.
3. Assemblies: Provide standard steel door and frame assemblies as required for the
following:
a. Labeled and fire rated.
4. Provide factory primed doors and frames to be field painted.
B. Painting primed doors and frames is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
C. Wood doors are specified in another Division 8 Section.
D. Door hardware is specified in another Division 8 Section.
E. Glass and Glazing are specified in another Division 8 Section.
F. Building in of anchors and grouting of frames in masonry construction is specified in
Division 4.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division
1 Specification Sections.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 1
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
B. Product data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction,
materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings,
profiles, and finishes.
' C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard steel doors and frames.
Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at
' openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door and
frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show
anchorage and accessory items.
' 1. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details
and openings as those on contract drawings.
2. Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing
requirements.
' D. Label Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated and
exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies, submit manufacturer's certification that each
' door and frame assembly has been constructed to conform to design, materials and
construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction.
' 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. .Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended
Specifications Standard Steel Doors and Frames" ANSUSDI-100 and as herein specified.
' B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door
and frame assemblies whose fire resistance characteristics have been determined per
ASTM E 152 and which are labeled and listed by UL, Factory Mutual, Warnock Hersey,
or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during
transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of
' factory-finished doors and frames.
' B. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired
provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to
Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 2
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inches
high wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which could
create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton
' immediately. Provide 1/4-inches spaces between stacked doors to promote air
circulation.
' PART 2 -PRODUCTS
' 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide standard steel doors
' and frames by one of the following:
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames:
'
a. Amweld Building Products, Inc.
b. Ceco Corp.
' c. Curries Company.
d. Republic Builders Products.
e. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co.
2.2 MATERIALS
' A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel,. pickled and oiled,
complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568.
'
B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with
ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568.
'
C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality,
complying with ASTM A 526, or drawing quality, ASTM A 642, hot dipped galvanized
' in accordance with ASTM A 525, with A60 or G60 coating designation, mill
phosphatized.
' D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18-gage sheet steel; galvanized where
used with galvanized frames.
' E. .Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built
into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanize in compliance with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as
' applicable.
F. Shop Applied Paint: Apply after fabrication.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 3
PHAS)/ I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' 1. Primer: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or baking, suitable as a
base for specified finish paints complying with ANSI A224.1, °'Test Procedure and
Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames."
' 2.3 DOORS
' A. Provide metal doors of types and styles or grades and models indicated on drawings or
schedules.
' B. Provide metal doors of SDI grades and models specified below or as indicated on
drawings or schedules:
1. Interior Doors: ANSUSDI-100, Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 3 or 4, minimum
18-gage cold-rolled sheet steel faces.
' 2. Exterior Doors: ANSUSDI-100, Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 4, minimum
16-gage galvanized steel faces.
' 2.4 FRAMES
A. Provide metal frames for doors and other openings, of types and styles as shown on
' drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate
frames of minimum 16-gage cold-rolled steel.
' 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners, welded construction.
2. Form exterior frames from 16-gage galvanized steel.
B. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on
strike jambs of single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-door frames.
' 2.5 FABRICATION
' A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects,
warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant.
Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory- assembled before shipment, to
' assure proper assembly at project site. Comply with ANSUSDI-100 requirements.
' 1. Internal Construction: Manufacturer's standard honeycomb, polyurethane,
polystyrene, unitized steel grid, vertical steel stiffeners, or rigid mineral fiber core
with internal sound deadener on inside of face sheets where appropriate in
' accordance with SDI standards.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 4
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
2. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads except between
non-fire-rated pairs of doors not more than 1/4 inch. Not more than 3/4 inch at
bottom.
' B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units,
from only cold-rolled steel.
C. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors
' and Frames."
' D. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers .and
moldings from either cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel.
' E. Fabricate exterior doors, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet steel in accordance
with SDI-112. Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors as integral part of door
construction or by addition of minimum 16-gage inverted steel channels.
~~
u
n
n
C
F. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads
for exposed screws and bolts.
G. Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown
or scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal insulating door and frame assemblies
and tested in accordance with ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door
assemblies.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with R factor of 11
or better.
H. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed
hardware in accordance with final Door Hardware Schedule and templates provided by
hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI Al 15 Series
Specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.
I. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping
for surface-applied hardware maybe done at project site.
J. Locate hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in accordance
with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware on Standard Steel Doors and
Frames," published by Door and Hardware Institute.
K. Shop Painting: Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units,
including galvanized surfaces.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 5
r
0
PHASEI
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials
' before application of paint.
2. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly
' .finished surface ready to receive finish paint.
J
' PART 3 -EXECUTION
~'~
fl
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final
shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified.
B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection
Instructions For Steel Frames," unless otherwise indicated.
1. Except for frames located at existing concrete, masonry or drywall installations,
place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames
accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces
and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
2. In masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location
on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors
include masonry wire anchors and masonry Tee anchors.
3. Install fire-rated frames in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80.
4. In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per j amb at hinge and strike
levels. In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws.
C. Door Installation: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances
' specified in ANSUSDI-100.
1. Install fire-rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80.
3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged
areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 6
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
B. Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protective plastic
wrappings from prefinished doors.
C. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hazdwaze items, leaving steel doors
and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition.
END OF SECTION 08111
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 7
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 08211 -FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to work of this
Section.
1.2 SLJIvIMARY
A. Extent and location of each type of flush wood door is indicated on drawings and in
schedules.
B. Types of doors required include the following:
1. Solid and hollow core wood doors.
C. Factory-prefitting to frames and factory-premachining for hardware for wood doors is
included in this section.
D. Metal door frames for flush wood doors are specified in another Division-8 section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Door manufacturer's technical data for each type of door, including
details of core and edge construction, trim for openings and louvers.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door,
elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware
blocking, fire ratings.
1. For factory-premachined doors, indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts for
locksets and other cutouts adjacent to light and louver openings.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standards: Comply with the following standards:
1. NWWDA Quality Standard: I.S.l "Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors", of
National Wood Window and Door Association (1~1WWDA).
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
2. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards"; including
' Section 1300 "Architectural Flush Doors", of Architectural Woodwork Institute
(AWI) for grade of door, core construction, finish and other. requirements
' exceeding those of NWVVDA quality standard.
B. Manufacturer: Obtain doors from a single manufacturer.
' 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
' A. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and
deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations
of 1`1WWDA pamphlet "How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood
' Doors", as well as with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with designation
' system used on shop drawings for door, frames, and hardware, using temporary,
removable or concealed markings.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and
' relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation
areas during remainder of construction period to comply with the following requirements
' applicable to project's geographical location:
1. Referenced AWI quality standard including Section 100-S-3 "Moisture Content".
1.7 WARRANTY
' A. General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the
Owner may have under the Contract Documents.
' B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement in door manufacturer's
standard form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or
replace defective doors that have warped (bow, cup or twist) or that show telegraphing of
core construction in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of
referenced quality standards.
' 1. Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time after date of
Substantial Completion.
2. Hollow Core Interior Doors:
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
a. Two years.
3. Solid Core Interior Doors:
a. Life of installation.
C. Contractor's Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors where Contractor's work
contributed to rejection or to voiding of manufacturer's warranty.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of
the following:
1. Solid and Hollow Core Doors with Wood Veneer Faces:
a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc.
b. Eggers Industries.
c. Mohawk Inc.
d. Weyerhauser Company.
2.2 INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS
A. Solid and hollow core doors for opaque finish:
1. Faces: Natural Birch, plain sliced.
2. AWI Grade: Economy.
3. Construction: Particleboard (solid core), SHC (hollow core)..
4. Fire Rating: As shown on door schedule.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate flush wood doors to produce doors complying with following requirements:
1. Factory-prefit and premachine doors to fit frame opening sizes indicated with
the following uniform clearances and bevels:
a. .Comply with tolerance requirements of AWI for prefitting. Comply with
final hardware schedules and door frame shop drawings and with hardware
templates.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
b. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify
dimensions and alignment before proceeding with factory premachining.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door:
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location,
and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level
heads.
2. .Reject doors with defects.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation see Division-8 "Finish Hardware" section of these
specifications.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's
instructions and of referenced AWI standard and as indicated.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.
C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 0821.1
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 4
I~
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 08410 - ALL:f~rIINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUNIlVIARY
A. This Section includes the following types of aluminum entrance and storefront work:
1. Exterior entrance doors.
2. Frames for entrances.
3. Storefront-type framing system.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Glazing requirements for aluminum entrances and storefront, including entrances
specified to be factory glazed, are included in Division 8 Section "Glass and
Glazing."
2. Lock cylinders are included in Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware", but installed
under this section.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies that comply with
performance characteristics specified, as demonstrated by testing the manufacturer's
corresponding stock assemblies according to test methods indicated.
B. Thermal Movement: Design the aluminum entrance and storefront framing systems to
provide for expansion and contraction of the component materials. Entrance doors shall
function normally over the specified temperature range.
1. The system shall be capable of withstanding a metal surface temperature range of
180 deg F (100 deg C) without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on
structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners, reduction of performance, stress
on glass, or other detrimental effects.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410 - 1
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
C. Design Requirements: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront systems that comply
' with structural performance, air infiltration, and water penetration requirements
indicated.
' D. Structural Performance: Conduct tests for structural performance in accordance with
ASTM E 330. At the conclusion of the tests there shall be no glass breakage or
permanent damage to fasteners, anchors, hardware or actuating mechanism. Framing
' members shall have no permanent deformation in excess of 0.2 percent of their clear
span..
' 1. Deflection Normal to the Plane of the Wall: Test pressure required to measure
deflection of framing members normal to the plane of the wall shall be equivalent
to the wind load specified above. Deflection shall not exceed 1/175 of the clear
' span, when subjected to uniform load deflection test.
2. Deflection Parallel to the Plane of the Wall: Test pressures required to measure
' deflection parallel to the plane of the wall shall be equal to 1.5 times the wind
pressures specified above. Deflection of any member carrying its full dead load
shall not exceed an amount that will reduce glass bite below 75 percent of the
design dimension and shall not reduce the edge clearance between the member and
the fixed panel, glass or other fixed member above to less than 1/8 inch. The
' clearance between the member and an operable door or window shall be at least
1/16 inch.
' E. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront framing system with an air
infiltration rate of not more than 0.06 CFM per sq. ft. of fixed area (excluding operable
door edges) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at an inward test pressure
' differential of 1.57 psf.
F. Water Penetration: Provide framing systems with no uncontrolled water penetration
' (excluding operable door edges) as defined in the test method when tested in accordance
with ASTM E 331 at an inward test pressure differential of 6.241bf per sq. ft.
' G. Condensation Resistance: Where framing systems are "thermal-break" construction,
provide units tested for thermal performance in accordance with AAMA 1503 showing
condensation resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 45.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
' A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 2
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' 1. Product data for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required,
including:
' a. Manufacturer's standard details and fabrication methods.
b. Data on finishing, hardware and accessories.
' c. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces.
2. Shop drawings for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required,
' including:
a. Layout and installation details, including relationship to adjacent work.
' b. Elevations at 1/4-inch scale.
c. Detail sections of typical composite members.
d. Anchors and reinforcement.
' e. Hardware mounting heights.
f. Provisions for expansion and contraction.
g. Glazing details.
f. Flashing details.
3. Hardware Schedule: Submit complete hardware schedule organized into sets
' based on hardware specified. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related
work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish. Include item
' name, name of the manufacturer and complete designations of every item required
for each door opening.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed
' installations of aluminum storefront and entrances similar in design and extent to
those required for the project and whose work has resulted in construction with a
record of successful in-service performance.
' B. Fabricator Qualifications: Provide aluminum entrances and storefront systems
fabricated by a firm experienced in producing systems that are similar to those
' indicated for this Project, and that have a record of successful in-service performance.
The fabricator shall have sufficient production capacity to produce components
' required without causing delay in progress of the Work.
C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum entrance and storefront systems from
' one source and from a single manufacturer.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 3
I~
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
D. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate the size, profile, and dimensional requirements
of aluminum entrance and storefront work required and are based on the specific types
and models indicated. Aluminum entrance and storefront by other manufacturers may
be considered, provided deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not
change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality
is on the proposer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver aluminum entrance and storefront components in the manufacturer's original
protective packaging.
B. Store aluminum components in a clean dry location away from uncured masonry or
concrete. Cover components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting
in a manner to permit circulation of air.
1. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent bending and avoid
significant or permanent damage.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check openings by .accurate field measurement before
fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the work.
1. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and
coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit.
1.8 WARRANTY
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide entrance and
storefront systems manufactured by one of the following:
1. CMI - Cronstroms Mfg. Inc.
2. Kawneer Company, Inc.
3. PPG Industries.
4. Tubelite Division of Indal, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410 - 4
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for
strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish; comply with
' ASTM B 221 for aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet or plate, and
ASTM B 211 for aluminum bars, rods and wire.
' B. Carbon steel reinforcement of aluminum framing members shall comply with
ASTM A 36 for structural shapes, plates and bars, ASTM A 611 for cold rolled sheet
and strip, or ASTM A 570 for hot rolled sheet and strip.
' C. Glass and Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements of "Glass and Glazing'°
section of these specifications.
D. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, zinc plated
steel, or other material warranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and
' compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors and other components.
1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum members less
than 0.125 inches thick, reinforce the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic
stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard noncorrosive
pressed-in splined grommet nuts.
1
2. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners except for application of
' hardware. For application of hardware, use Phillips flat-head machine screws
that match the finish of member or hardware being fastened.
' E. Concealed Flashing: 0.0179-inch (26 gage) minimum dead-soft stainless steel, or
0.026-inch-thick minimum extruded aluminum of alloy and type selected by
manufacturer for compatibility with other components.
F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high-strength aluminum brackets and
reinforcements; where use of aluminum is not feasible provide nonmagnetic stainless
' steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123.
' G. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Provide cast iron, malleable iron, or hot-dip galvanized
steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123.
' H. Compression Weather-stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable compressible
weather-stripping gaskets of molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 or
molded PVC complying with ASTM D 2287.
' 2.3 HARDWARE
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 5
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
A. General: Refer to Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware" for requirements for hardware
' items other than those indicated to be provided by the aluminum entrance
manufacturer.
' B. Provide heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled, or required for operation
of each door, including the following items of sizes, number, and type recommended
by manufacturer for service required; finish to match door.
1. Offset Pivot Sets: Comply with ANSI A156.4, Grade 1. Provide exposed parts
' of cast aluminum alloy. Provide an intermediate pivot for doors over 7 feet 6
inches high.
' 2. Surface-Mounted Overhead Closers: Heavy duty type (LCN 4010) with cover,
for hinge side installation. Comply with ANSI A156.4, Grade 1. Comply with
manufacturer's recommendations for closer size, depending on door size,
' exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use.
3. Cylinders are supplied under another Division 8 Section but are to be installed
' under this section.
' 4. Exit Device: Concealed rod type with crash bar, bronze finish.
5. Flushbolts: Standard edge mortised lever extension type flush bolts for inactive
' leaves of pairs of doors. Provide flushbolts at top of doors only. Comply with
ANSI A156.16.
' 6. Pulls: Aluminum pulls of "CS-9" style (Kawneer). Bronze - US l OB oil rubbed
finish.
' 7. Thresholds: Extruded aluminum threshold, heavy duty design, in mill finish,
complete with anchors and clips, coordinated with pivots and floor-concealed
closers.
' 2.4 COMPONENTS
' A. Storefront Framing System: Provide storefront and entrance framing systems
fabricated from extruded aluminum members of size and profile indicated. Include
' subframes and other reinforcing members of the type indicated. Provide for flush
glazing storefront from the exterior on all sides without projecting stops.
Shop-fabricate and preassemble frame components where possible. Provide storefront
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 6
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
frame sections without exposed seams. Provide sill flashing per storefront
' manufacturer, continuously at sill.
1. Mullion Configurations: Provide pockets at the inside glazing face to receive
' .resilient elastomeric glazing. Mullions and horizontals shall be one piece.
Make provisions to drain moisture accumulation to the exterior.
B. Entrance Door Frames: Provide tubular and channel frame entrance door frame
assemblies, as indicated, with welded or mechanical joints in accordance with
manufacturer's standards. Reinforce as necessary to support required loads.
C. Stile-and-Rail Type Entrance Doors: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with
' mechanical joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie-rods or
j-bolts.
' 1. Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or panels, without
disassembly of stiles and rails. Provide snap-on extruded aluminum glazing
stops, with exterior stops anchored for nonremoval.
' 2. Desi :Provide 1-3/4-inch-thick doors of desi indicated.
~ ~
' a. Narrow stile (2-inch nominal width).
' 2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate aluminum entrance and storefront components to designs, sizes
and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. Sizes and profile
requirements are indicated on the drawings. Variable dimensions are indicated, with
maximum and minimum dimensions required, to achieve design requirements and
' coordination with other work.
B. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and
' other work to the greatest extent possible before shipment to the Project site.
Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
' 1. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and
grinding of metal work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces. Complete
these operations for hardware prior to application of finishes.
2. Do not .drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of
' installation at project site.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 7
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
C. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations. Grind exposed welds smooth to
' remove weld spatter and welding oxides. Restore mechanical finish.
1. .Welding behind finished surfaces shall be performed in such a manner as to
' minimize distortion and discoloration on the finished surface.
D. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as necessary for
performance requirements, sag resistance and rigidity.
' E. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint, or a suitable
sealant, or a nonabsorptive plastic or elastomeric tape, or a gasket between the
surfaces. Do not use coatings containing lead.
F. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of
contacting members.
' G. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible.
H. Weather-stripping: For exterior doors, provide compression weather-stripping against
fixed stops. At other edges, provide sliding weather-stripping retained in adjustable
strip mortised into door edge.
' 1. At interior doors and other locations without weather-stripping, provide
neoprene silencers on stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact.
' 2.6 F1I~IISHES
' A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations
relative to application and designations of finishes.
B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the
Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
' C. Fluorocarbon 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat thermo-cured
system, composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluorocarbon color
topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylide fluoride resin by weight;
' comply with AAMA 605.2.
' 1. Color and Gloss: See drawings for finish.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
' 3.1 EXAMINATION
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 8
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
A. Examine substrates and supports, with the Installer present, for compliance with
' requirements indicated, installation tolerances, and other conditions that affect
installation of aluminum entrances and storefronts. Correct unsatisfactory conditions
before proceeding with the installation.
1. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
' 3.2 INSTALLATION
' A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation.
B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members,
doors, or panels. Install components in proper alignment and relation to established
lines and grades indicated. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.
' C. Construction Tolerances: Install aluminum entrance and storefront to comply with the
following tolerances:
1. Variation from Plane: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 12 feet of length or 1/4 inch in
1 any total length.
2. Offset from Alignment: The maximum offset from true alignment between two
' identical members abutting end to end in line shall not exceed 1/16 inch.
t 3. Diagonal Measurements: The maximum difference in diagonal measurements
shall not exceed 1/8 inch.
t 4. Offset at Corners: The maximum out-of--plane offset of framing at corners shall
not exceed 1/32 inch.
' D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or
electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.
' 1. Zinc or cadmium plate steel anchors and other unexposed fasteners .after
fabrication.
' 2. Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes over aluminum.
' 3. Paint aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete or other masonry with
alkali resistant coating.
' 4. Paint wood and .similar absorptive material in contact with aluminum and
exposed to the elements or otherwise subject to wetting, with two .coats of
aluminum house paint. Seal joints between the materials with sealant.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 9
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' E. Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surface-mounted hardware items. Comply
with hardware manufacturer's instructions and template requirements. Use concealed
fasteners wherever possible.
F. Set sill members and flashin in bed of sealant as indicated, or with joint fillers or
g
gaskets as indicated to provide weathertight construction. Comply with requirements
' of Division 7 for sealants, fillers, and gaskets.
' G. Refer to "Glass and Glazing" Section of Division 8 for installation of glass and other
panels indicated to be glazed into doors and framing, and not preglazed by
manufacturer.
3.3 ADJUSTING
' A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding,
and for weathertight closure.
1 3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care
' to avoid damage to coatings.
B. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in the
' "Glass and Glazing" Section for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing
and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum.
3.5 PROTECTION
' A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction
period to ensure that aluminum entrances and storefronts will be without damage or
deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION 08410
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 10
i~
PHASEI
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 08710 -DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are
required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware
specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are
installed.
B. This Section includes the following:
1. Hinges.
2. Lock cylinders and keys.
3. Lock and latch sets.
4. Closers.
5. Weather-stripping for exterior doors.
6. Thresholds.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for silencers integral
with hollow metal frames.
2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for factory prefitting and factory
premachining of doors for door hardware.
3. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts" for aluminum
entrance door hardware, except cylinders.
D. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include:
1. Cylinders for locks on entrance doors.
2. Final replacement cores and keys to be installed by Owner.
DOOR HARDWARE
08710 - 1
u
J
I;~
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door
hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other
information necessary to show compliance with requirements.
C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure
proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize
schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item
required for each door or opening. Include the following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item.
b. Name and manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings
both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule.
e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in
' schedule.
f. Mounting locations for hardware.
' g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
h. Keying information.
2. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly
' where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work
that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include with schedule the
product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware,
and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule.
' 3. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the
Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.
' DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 2
i~
L
0
i
i
ii
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
D. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the
installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with
indicated requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets,
hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer.
B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, .with
warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful
in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and
quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced architectural
hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at
reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation.
1. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to
obtain final instructions in writing.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by
hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly
marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved
hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets maybe packed in same container.
B. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives. of hardware supplier and
hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct.
C. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation
(shop or Project site).
D. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed.
Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately
replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses
both before and after installation.
1.6 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance,
and removal and replacement of door hardware.
t DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 3
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that are to be incorporated in the Work include:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Butts and Hinges: _
a. Hager Hinge Co.
b. McKinney Products Co.
c. Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works.
2. Locksets and Passage Sets:
a. Corbin &Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp.
b. Sargent Manufacturing Company.
c. Schlage Lock, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware.
d. Yale Security Inc.
3. Lock Cylinders:
a. Schlage Lock, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware.
4. Exit/Panic Devices:
a. Adams,Rite Manufacturing Co.
b. Sargent Manufacturing Co.
c. Von Duprin.
5. Overhead Closers:
a. Corbin &Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp.
b. LCN, 4000 Series, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group.
c. Monarch Hardware & Mfg. Co., Div. Newman Tonks, Inc.
d. Norton Door Controls, Div. Yale Security Inc.
e. Sargent Manufacturing Company.
DOOR HARDWARE
08710 - 4
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' 6. Weather-Stripping:
a. Hager Hinge Co.
' b. National Guard Products, Inc.
c. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
' 7. Thresholds:
a. Hager Hinge Co.
' b. National Guard Products, Inc.
c. Reese Enterprises, Inc. _
2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE
A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of
each type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of
this Section. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the
following:
1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one
manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of
establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or,
where more than one manufacturer is specified under the Article
' "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of
one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements.
2. ANSUBHMA designations used elsewhere in this Section or in schedules to
describe hardware items or to define quality or function are derived from the
following standards. Provide products complying with these standards and
' requirements specified elsewhere in this Section.
a. Butts and Hinges: ANSUBHMA A156.1.
b. Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches: ANSUBHMA A156.2.
c: Exit Devices: ANSUBHMA A156.3.
d. Door Controls -Closers: ANSUBHMA A156.4.
e. Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products: ANSUBHMA A156.5.
f. Architectural Door Trim: ANSUBHMA A156.6.
g. Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSUBHMA A156.7.
h. Door Controls -Overhead Holders: ANSUBHMA A156.8.
i. Interconnected Locks and Latches: ANSUBHMA A156.12.
' j. Mortise Locks and Latches: ANSUBHMA A156.13.
k. Sliding and Folding Door Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.14.
1. Closer Holder Release Devices: ANSI/BHMA A156.15.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 5
' PHASEI
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
t ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' m. Auxiliary Hardware: ANSUBHMA A156.16.
n. Self-Closing Hinges and Pivots: ANSUBHMA A156.17.
o. Materials and Finishes: ANSUBHMA A156.18.
2.3 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
' A. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have
manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable
nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise
' acceptable to Architect.
1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
'
B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and formin method indicated,
g
using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in
' no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable
hardware units by applicable ANSIBHMA A156 series standards for each type of
hardware item and with ANSUBHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do
' not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as
otherwise specified.
C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates,
generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has
' been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated.
D. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head
1 screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition)
screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match
finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces
' to receive painted finish.
E. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed
' except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed
fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite
' face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the
work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a
means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw
' fasteners.
2.4 HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS
'
A. Tem fates: Exce t for hin es and ivots to be installed entirel both leaves) into
p p g p Y(
wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 6
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following requirements:
1. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes.
2. For wood doors and frames install wood screws.
3. For fire-rated wood doors install #12 x 1-1/4-inch, threaded-to-the-head steel
wood screws.
4. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots.
C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:
1. Out-Swing Exterior Doors: Nonremovable pins.
2. Out-Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Nonremovable pins.
3. Interior Doors: Nonrising pins.
4. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves, except where
hospital tip (HT) indicated.
D. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per
door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30
inches of additional height.
1. Fire-Rated Doors: Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 86 inches or
less in height with same rule for additional hinges.
E. Operation: Provide hinges that allow all doors to swing 180°.
2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. Lock Cylinders: Interchangeable 6 pin core keyed to construction master.
B. Masterkey all lock cylinders as directed by the Owner.
C. Furnish two change keys for each lock, six masterkeys for each masterkey set, 6
construction keys, and two removable core control keys.
D. Stamp keys with file key number and "Do Not Copy".
E. Ship masterkeys and control keys to the Owner via registered mail.
DOOR HARDWARE
08710 - 7
PHASE I
M1NN7EAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
F. Furnish one Teklee Model REC and AWC key cabinet with a capacity of 1.5 times the
number of key sets; prepare the numerical, alphabetical and key change index record
book; tag all keys; and numerically place permanent file keys in the cabinet.
' 2.6 LOCKSETS AND PASSAGE SETS
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock
bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set, unless
otherwise indicated.
'
1. Provide flat lip strikes for locks with 3-piece, antifriction latchbolts as
recommended by manufacturer.
B. Lock Throw: Provide 5/8-inch minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors. Comply
with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings.
'
C. O eratin Devices: Hea dut lever desi
p g vY Y ~
' 2.7 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES
A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the
manufacturer's recommendations for heavy duty design with size of door control unit
depending on size of door (3'-0" or 4'-0" w or as indicated on drawing), exposure to
weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Unit to allow for dead stop function.
2.8 WEATHER-STRIPPING AND SEALS
'
A. General: Provide continuous weather-stri in on exterior doors and smoke, light, or
pp g
sound seals on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive
' fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
' 2.9 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide heavy duty metal threshold unit of
' type, size, and profile as shown or scheduled.
B. Exterior Hinged or Pivoted Doors: Provide units not less than 4 inches wide, formed
' to accommodate change in floor elevation where indicated, fabricated to accommodate
door hardware and to fit door frames, and as follows:
' 1. For in-swinging doors provide units with interlocking lip and interior. drain
channel; include hook on bottom edge of door and drain pan.
' DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 8
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' 2. For out-swinging doors provide units with interlocking lip and with hook on
bottom edge of door to act as weather bar.
' 2.10 HARDWARE FINISHES
A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and
' lock sets (or push-pull units if no latch or lock sets).
B. Provide finishes that match those established by BHMA; US32D -Satin Stainless
' Steel.
C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any),
' composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards,
but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of
' hardware. ,
D. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the
' industry-recognized standard commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted.
PART 3 -EXECUTION -
' 3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except
as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except
as otherwise directed by Architect.
' "
Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and
1.
Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute.
'
"Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and
2.
' Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute.
3. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush
' Doors."
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and
' recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or
into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate
removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing
' work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until
finishes have been completed on the substrates involved.
' DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 9
0
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the
attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
n
n
D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners.
Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic
sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."
F. Weather-stripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.
3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper
operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate
freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made.
1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior. to acceptance or
occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to
acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware
items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore
proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices
to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
C. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware
and hardware finishes.
D. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after the date of Substantial
Completion, the Installer, accompanied by representatives of the manufacturers of
latchsets and locksets and of door control devices, and of other major hardware
suppliers, shall return to the Project to perform the following work:
1. Examine and re-adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore
function of doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements.
i
2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the
maintenance procedures.
3. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design,
materials, or installation of hardware units.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 10
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
4. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial
nature) in the performance of the hazdwaze.
3.3 .HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide hazdwaze for each door to comply with requirements of Section
"Door Hazdwaze," hazdwaze set numbers indicated in door schedule, and in the
following schedule of hazdwaze sets.
1. Hazdwaze sets indicate quantity, item, manufacturer and product designation,
size, and finish or color, as applicable...
2. Hardware sets indicate quantity, item, ANSI designation, size, and finish or
color, as applicable.
3. Provide floor or wall stops as required.
4. Hardware Schedule: Provide hardware as scheduled below.
Set No. 1: (Front Entry Tenant Door)
Lock Cylinder.
Set No. 2: (Tenant Reaz Service Door, Utility Room Door)
Butts, 1-1/2 Pair
Exit/Panic Device
Lockset with Lockguard
Closer
Threshold
Weather-Stripping
Head Frame Flashing
Set No. 3: (Utility Room Door)
Butts, 1-1%i Pair
Lockset with Lockguazd
Closer
Threshold
Weather-Stripping
Head Frame Flashing
Set No. 4: (Tenant Restroom)
DOOR HARDWARE
08710 - 11
' PHA E I
S
' MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' Butts, 1-1/2 Pair
Lockset, Privacy
' Set No. 5: (Public Restroom)
Butts, 1-1/2 Pair
' Passage Set
Closer
' Set No. 6: (Janitor)
Butts, 1-1/2 Pair
Lockset, Classroom
' END OF SECTION 08710
1
1
' DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 12
PHASE I
' MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' SECTION 08800 -GLASS AND GLAZING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to work of
this Section.
' 1.2 SUMMARY
A. Extent of glass and glazing work is indicated on drawings and schedules.
t B. T es of work in this section include lass and lazin for:
YP g g g
' 1. Storefront construction.
2. Entrance doors.
' 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
' A. Provide glass and glazing that has been produced, fabricated and installed to withstand
normal thermal movement, wind loading and impact loading (where applicable),
without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to
' remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glass and glazing materials and other
defects in the work.
1. Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from an ambient
temperature range of 120 deg. F (67 deg. C) and from a consequent temperature
range within glass and glass framing members of 180 deg. F (100 deg. C).
2. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal due to
other causes than breakage which results in intrusion of dirt or moisture, internal
condensation or fogging, deterioration of protected internal glass coating, if any,
resulting from seal failure, and any other visual evidence of seal failure or
performance.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
' A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each glazing material and
fabricated glass product required, including installation and maintenance instructions.
ii
I' GLASS AND GLAZING
08800 - 1
PHASE I
' MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' B. .Samples: Submit, for verification purposes, 12" square samples of each type of glass
indicated except for clear single pane units, and 12" long samples of each color
required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install
' sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative of adjoining
framing system in color.
' C. Certificate: Submit certificates from respective manufacturers attesting that glass and
glazing materials furnished for project comply with requirements.
' 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing
Association (FGMA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where more
stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of
' glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced
standards.
' B. Safety Glazing Standard: Where safety glass is indicated or required by authorities
having jurisdiction, provide type of products indicated which comply with ANSI
297.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials.
' C. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently
marked either on spacers or at least one component pane of units with appropriate
' certification label of inspecting and testing organization indicated below:
1. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC).
t D. in le Source Res onsibili for Glass: To ensure consistent ualit of a earance
S g p tY q Y pp
' and performance, provide materials produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator
for each kind and condition of glass indicated and composed of primary glass obtained
from a single source for each type and class required.
' 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
' A. Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage and handling to comply
with manufacturer's directions and as required to prevent edge damage to glass, and
damage to glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture including
' condensation, of temperature changes, of direct exposure to sun, and from other
causes.
' 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
' A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing material
' GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 2
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' manufacturer or when joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation or other
causes.
' PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of
the following:
' 1. Manufacturers of Insulating Glass:
' a. Guardian Industries Corp.
b. Hordis Brothers, Inc.
' c. PPG Industries, Inc.
2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
' A. Primary Glass Standard: Provide primary glass which complies with ASTM C 1036
requirements, including those indicated by reference to type, class, quality, and, if
' applicable, form, finish, mesh and pattern.
B. Heat-Treated Glass Standard: Provide heat-treated glass which complies with ASTM
' C 1048 requirements, including those indicated by reference to kind, condition, type,
quality, class, and, if applicable, form, finish, and pattern.
1 C. Sizes: Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing openings indicated, with edge
clearances and tolerances complying with recommendations of glass manufacturer.
Provide thicknesses indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by glass
' manufacturer for application indicated. '
' 2.3 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS
A. General: Provide preassembled units consisting of organically sealed panes of glass
' enclosing a hermetically sealed dehydrated air space and complying with ASTM E 774
for performance classification indicated as well as with other requirements specified
for glass characteristics, air space, sealing system, sealant, spacer material, corner
' design and desiccant.
1. For properties of individual glass panes making up units, refer to product
' requirements specified elsewhere in this section applicable to types, classes,
kinds and conditions of glass products indicated.
' 2. Provide heat-treated panes of kind and at locations indicated or, if not indicated,
provide heat-strengthened panes where recommended by manufacturer for
' GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 3
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
application indicated and tempered where indicated or where safety glass is
designated or required.
3. Performance Classification per ASTM E 774: Class A.
4. Thickness of Each Pane: 1/4".
5. Air Space Thickness: 1/2".
6. Spacer Material: Manufacturer's standard metal.
7. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction.
B. Uncoated Insulating Glass Units: Manufacturer's standard units complying with the
following requirements:
1. Exterior Pane: Clear float glass.
a. Kind: As indicated.
2. Interior Pane of Glass: Clear float glass.
a. Kind: As indicated.
3. Performance Characteristics: Visible light transmittance of 46- 47 percent,
summer daytime U-value of 0.56-0.57, winter nighttime U-value of 0.49,
shading coefficient of 0.56-0.58 and outdoor reflectance of 8 percent.
2.4 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS AND PREFORMED GLAZING TAPES:.
A. General: Provide products of type indicated and complying with the following
requirements:
1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with
other materials with which they will come into contact, including glass
products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under
conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field
experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with recommendations of sealant and .glass manufacturers
for selection of glazing sealants and tapes which .have performance
characteristics suitable for applications indicated and conditions at time of
installation.
GLASS AND GLAZING
08800 - 4
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
3. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically
' curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with
ASTM C 920 requirements, including those for Type, Grade, Class and Uses.
' 4. Colors: Provide color of exposed sealants indicated or, if not otherwise
indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
G
B. ,
Two-Part Polysulfide Glazing Sealant: Type M; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, M,
A, and, as applicable to uses indicated, O.
'
C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
' 1. Two-Part Polysulfide Glazing Sealant:
' a. "Chem-Calk 200"; Bostik Construction Products Div.
nthacalk GC-5"
Pecora Cor
b
"S
y
;
p.
.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS:
A. Compatibility: Provide materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces
' contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
'
C. Settin Blocks: Neo rene, EPDM or silicone blocks as re uired for compatibility with
g p q
glazing sealants, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness.
D. Spacers: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks, or continuous extrusions, as required
for compatibility with glazing sealant, of size, shape and hardness recommended by
glass and sealant manufacturers for application indicated.
' E. Edge Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with
glazing sealant, of size and hardness required to limit lateral movement (side-walking)
of glass.
' PART 3 EXECUTION
-
' 3.1 EXAMINATION
~I
n
A. Require Glazier to inspect work of glass framing erector for compliance with
manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets
at corners; for presence and functioning of weep system; for existence of minimum
required face or edge clearances; and for effective sealing of joinery. Obtain Glazier's
written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of glazing work. Do not
allow glazing work to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 5
~l
n
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass, immediately
before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove
lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are indicated for use.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined printed recommendations of glass manufacturers, of
' manufacturers of sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials, except where more
stringent requirements are indicated, including those of referenced glazing standards.
ii
~I
C~'~
J
LI
i
B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated in details are intended to provide for
necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant
thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at time
of installation.
C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation; use a rolling block in
rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal
framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift
glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass with flares or bevels along one horizontal edge
which would occur in vicinity of setting blocks so that these are located at top of
opening. Remove from project and dispose of glass units with edge damage or other
imperfections of kind that, when installed, weakens glass and impairs performance and
appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined
by proconstruction sealant-substrate testing.
3.4 GLAZING
A. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located one quarter of glass width
from each corner, but with edge nearest corner not closer than 6" from corner, unless
otherwise required. Set blocks in thin course of sealant which is acceptable for heel
bead use.
B. Provide spacers inside and out, of correct size and spacing to preserve required face
clearances, for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height), except
where gaskets or glazing tapes with continuous spacer rods are used for glazing.
Provide 1/8" minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed
thickness of tape.
C. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing standard,
except where otherwise required by glass unit manufacturer.
GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 6
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' D. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar
characteristics.
' E. Provide compressible filler rods or equivalent back-up material, as recommended by
sealant and glass manufacturers, to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel
weep systems and from adhering to joints back surface as well as to control depth of
sealant for optimum performance, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete
"wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
G. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial "wash" away from glass.
Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel, so as to
eliminate dirt and moisture pockets.
' H. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant
or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not
"walk" out when installation is subjected to movement.
I. Miter cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in manner recommended
' by gasket manufacturer to prevent pull away at corners; seal corner joints and butt
joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation by use of crossed
1 streamers attached to framing and held away from glass. Do not apply markers to
surfaces of glass. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact
' with glass, remove immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry
' surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less often than once a month,
for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits or staining. When examination reveals
presence of these forms of residue, remove by method recommended by glass
' manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in
other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and
vandalism.
' GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 7
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
E. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections
' intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Wash glass
by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 08800
1
GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 8
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 09250 -GYPSUM DRYWALL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Extent of each type of gypsum drywall construction required is indicated on Drawings.
B. This Section includes the following types of gypsum board construction:
1. Steel framing members to receive gypsum board.
2. Gypsum board screw-attached to steel framing and furring members.
C. Load-bearing steel studs and "C" shaped steel joists for structural framing are specified
in Division-5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing."
D. Hollow metal frames are specified in Division 8 Section but are to be installed under
this section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data from manufacturers for each type of product specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction which
are identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance rating has been determined
per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of gypsum board and related joint
treatment materials from a single manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250 - 1
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage
from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic
and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging.
' C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend
or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.6
A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions
for application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with
gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Minimum Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to
framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and
' finishing of gypsum board maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours
prior to application and continuously thereafter until drying is complete.
' C. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying joint treatment
materials. Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather_to prevent materials form drying too
' rapidly.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1. Steel Framin and Furrin
g g
' a. Dale Industries, Inc.
b. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
' c. Incor, Inc.
d. United States Gypsum Co.
2. Gypsum Boards and Related Products:
a. Domtar Gypsum Co.
b. Georgia-Pacific Corp.
c. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
d. United States Gypsum Co.
GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 2
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
B. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat-shaped, depth of 7/8 inch, and
minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows:
1. Thickness: 0.0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS
A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 deg
and doubled over to form 3/16" minimum lip (return) and complying with the
following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:
1. Thickness: 25 gage, unless noted otherwise.
2. Depth: As indicated.
2.3 GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to
minimize end-to-end joints.
1. Thickness: Provide gypsum board in thicknesses indicated, or if not otherwise
indicated, in 5/8 inch thicknesses to comply with ASTM C 840 for application
system and support spacing indicated.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, and as follows:
1. Type: Regular, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Type X for fire-resistance-rated assemblies.
3. Edges: Tapered.
4. Thickness: As indicated.
C. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630, and as follows:
1. Type: Regular, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Type X for fire-resistance-rated assemblies.
3. Thickness: As indicated.
D. Exterior Gypsum Board: ASTM C 931, with manufacturer's standard edges, of type
and thickness indicated below:
1. Type: Regular, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250 - 3
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Cornerbead and Edge Trim for Interior Installation: Provide corner beads, edge trim
and control joints which comply with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated
below:
1. Material: Formed metal, plastic or metal combined with paper, with metal
complying with the following requirement:
a. Sheet steel zinc-coated by hot-dip process.
2. Edge trim shapes indicated below by reference to designations of Fig. 1 in
ASTM C 1047:
a. "LC" Bead, unless otherwise indicated.
b. "U" Bead where indicated.
3. One-Piece Control Joint: Formed with vee-shaped slot per Fig. 1 in ASTM C
1047, with slot opening covered with removable strip.
2.5 GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials complying with ASTM C 475, ASTM C 840, and
recommendations of manufacturer of both gypsum board and joint treatment materials
for the application indicated.
B. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall construction which comply
with referenced standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer of the gypsum
board.
B. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting-type joint compound of type recommended for spot
grouting hollow metal door frames.
C. Gypsum Board Screws: ASTM C 1002.
D. Asphalt Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15).
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250 - 4
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
PART 3 -EXECUTION
' E~:AMINATION
3.1
' A. Examine substrates to which drywall construction attaches or abuts, preset hollow
metal frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for
' compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of drywall construction. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
' 3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
' A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C
754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work and
for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab. bars, toilet accessories,
furnishings, and similar construction to comply with details indicated and with
' recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, or if none available, with "Gypsum
Construction Handbook published by United States Gypsum Co.
C. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by
structural movement, at locations indicated below to comply with details shown on
' Drawings:
1. Where partition and wall framing abuts overhead structure.
' D. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furring
members; independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members or
' as indicated.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS
' A. Install runners tracks at floors ceilin s and structural walls and columns where
~ ) g
' gypsum drywall stud system abuts other construction.
1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt steps
' between studs and wall.
B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that
' fastening surface do not vary more than 1/8 inch from plane of faces of adjacent
framing.
GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 5
e
~,i
~~
n
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above
suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended
ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around
ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.
D. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated.
0
0
II
1. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than
that required by referenced steel framing installation standard.
E. For single layer construction: 24 inches on center.
F. Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and gypsum boards can be
installed in the direction opposite to that of the flange.
G. Frame door openings to comply with details indicated, with GA-219 and with
applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. Attach vertical
studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door
frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to j amb studs.
H. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated, or if none
indicated, in same manner as required for door openings; and install framing below
sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.
3.4 APPLICATION AND FI1~IISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standard: Install and finish gypsum board
to comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install walUpartition boards in manner which minimizes the number of end-butt joints
or avoids them entirely where possible. At stairwells and similar high walls, install
boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs.
C. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or
damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more
than 1/16 inch open space between boards. Do not force into place.
D. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications where
intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints.
Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and
mill-cut or field-cut ends against mill-cut or field-cut ends. Do not place tapered edges
against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides
of partitions.
I' GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 6
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
E. Attach gypsum board to steel studs so that leading edge or end of each board is
' .attached to open (unsupported) edge of stud flange first.
F. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional
support at openings and cutouts.
G. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid core wood doors, hollow metal doors
' and doors over 32 inches wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip just before
inserting board into frame.
H. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated, with space between
edges of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories.
'
I. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum board in concealed
spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chase walls which are braced internally.
'
1. Except where concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air
' or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8
and maybe limited to not less than 75 percent of full coverage.
sq
ft
area
.
.
,
2. Fit gypsum board around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
J. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments.
' Provide 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch space and trim edge with "U" bead edge trim. Seal joints
with acoustical sealant.
e K. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced gypsum board
application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations.
3.5 METHODS OF GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION
A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard as follows:.
' 1. On artitions/walls a 1 sum board verticall arallel to framin ), unless
p PPY1~ Y~ g
' otherwise indicated, and provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints.
2. On partitions/walls 8'-1" or less in height apply gypsum board horizontally
' (perpendicular to framing); use maximum length sheets possible to minimize
end j oints.
' B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum boards to supports as follows:
1. Fasten with screws.
GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 7
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
2. Fasten with cadmium-plated screws, or with galvanized or aluminum nails
' where supports are nailable.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as
' required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges to comply
with manufacturer's recommendations.
' B. Install corner beads at external corners.
C. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed
' or semi-exposed, and except where plastic trim is indicated. Provide type with face
flange to receive joint compound except where "U" bead (semi-finishing type) is
indicated.
' 1. Install "LC" bead where all construction is ti htl abutted to other
dn'~' g Y
construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate.
2. Install U-type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant-filled
(including expansion joints).
D. Install U-bead where indicated, and where exterior gypsum board edges are not
' covered by applied moldings or indicated to receive edge trim with face flanges
covered with joint compound.
E. Install control joints at locations indicated, or if not indicated, at spacings and
locations required by referenced gypsum board application and finish standard, and
approved by the Architect for visual effect.
' 3.7 FINISHING OF DRYWALL
A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of
corner bead, edge trim, and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects
' and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration.
B. Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using setting-type joint
compound.
C. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessories are
' indicated.
GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 8
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
D. Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying the following joint compounds in 3
coats (not including prefill of openings in base), and sand between coats and after last
coat:
1. Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or taping
compound.
2. Fill (Second) Coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or topping compound.
3. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or topping compound.
E. Partial Finishing: Omit third coat and sanding on concealed drywall construction
which is indicated for drywall finishing or which requires finishing to achieve
fire-resistance rating, sound rating or to act as air or smoke barrier.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner .suitable to Installer,
which ensures gypsum drywall construction being without damage or deterioration at
time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09250
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250 - 9
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 09253 -GYPSUM SHEATHING
PARTI-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 1, apply to this
Section.
1.2 .SUMMARY
A. This Section includes gypsum sheathing attached to steel framing members of exterior
walls.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for steel framing supporting
gypsum sheathing.
2. Division 7 Section "Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems -Class PB" for
insulation board and protective finish coating applied over gypsum sheathing.
3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Drywall" for steel-framed assemblies with gypsum
sheathing on the exterior and gypsum wallboard on the interior.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology Standard: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505
for definitions of terms for gypsum sheathing board construction not defined in this
Section or in other referenced standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each gypsum sheathing product through one source from a
single manufacturer.
GYPSUM SHEATHING 09253 - 1
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in on final acka es, containers, or bundles, each bearing brand name
g p g
' and identification of manufacturer.
B. Store materials protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface
contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, or other causes. Neatly stack gypsum
' sheathing board flat on leveled supports off the ground, under cover, and fully protected
from weather.
UENCING AND SCHEDULING
SE
1.7 Q
' A. Sequence installing sheathing with installing exterior cladding to comply with
requirements indicated below:
1. Do not leave glass-mat gypsum sheathing board exposed to weather for more than
180 days.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM SHEATHING BOARD
A. Moisture Resistant Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177.
1. Type and Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thick.
' 2. Size: 48 by 96 inches (1219 by 2438 mm).
3. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may
1 be incorporated into the Work includes, but is not limited to, "Dens-Glass Gold"
by Georgia-Pacific Corp.
' 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for
' thickness of sheathing board to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-
. protective coating having asalt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to
' ASTM B 117, and as follows:
1. Provide steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 to attach sheathing to
' steel framing less than 0.0329 inch (0.835 mm) thick.
GYPSUM SHEATHING 09253 - 2
' PHASEI
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
B. Glass-Fiber Sheathing Tape for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Self-adhering glass-
fiber tape, minimum 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads per inch (390
by 390 or 390 by 780 threads per meter), of type recommended by sheathing and tape
manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat
gypsum sheathing board and with a history of successful in-service use.
' PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install gypsum sheathing to comply with GA-253 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Cut boards at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of the work; fit tightly against
abutting construction, except provide a 3/8-inch (9-mm) setback where non-load-
bearing construction abuts structural elements.
C. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint sealant installation so these
' materials are installed in the sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from
passing through completed exterior wall assembly.
D. Apply fasteners so screw heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not
cut into facing.
E. Do not bridge building expansion joints with sheathing; cut and space edges to match
spacing of structural support elements.
' F. Vertical Installation: Install 48-inch- (1219-mm-) wide gypsum sheathing boards
vertically with vertical edges centered over flanges of steel studs. Abut ends and edges
' of each board with those of adjacent boards. Screw-attach boards at perimeter ahd
within field of board to each steel stud as follows:
1. Fasteners spaced approximately 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. and set back a minimum
of 3/8 inch (9 mm) from edges and ends of boards.
2. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing board joints and
apply and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed sealant in entire face of tape.
Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely
covered. Seal other penetrations and openings.
END OF SECTION 09253
GYPSUM SHEATHING 09253 - 3
i
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 09300 -TILE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Unglazed quarry tile.
2. Ceramic tile.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Division 3 Section "Concrete Work" for m_ onolithic slab finishes specified for
the substrates.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of Contract and Division
1 Specification Sections.
B. Samples for verification purposes of each item listed below, prepared on samples of
size and construction indicated, products involve color and texture variations, in sets
showing full range of variations expected.
1. Each type and composition of the and for each color and texture required, at
least 12 inches square, mounted on plywood or hardboard backing and grouted.
2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type,
composition, and variety of the from a single source with resources to provide
products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying
progress of the Work.
TILE
09300 - 1
PHASE 1
JOHNSON CREEK FACTORY SHOPPES
JOHNSON CREEK, WISCONSIN
B. Single-Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients
1 of a uniform quality from one manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture
component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
' C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully
completed the installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for
e Project.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
' A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and
labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling
' sealed the packages.
B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and
other causes.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions and rotect work durin and after installation to
P _ g
comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations.
B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to the work from carbon dioxide
' buildup.
C. Maintain temperatures of 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more in tiled areas during installation
and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced
installation standard or manufacturer's instructions.
' 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials that match products installed
as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels clearly describing contents.
' 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of
amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: See room finish schedule.
TILE 09300 - 2
PHASE 1
JOHNSON CREEK FACTORY SHOPPES
JOHNSON CREEK, WISCONSIN
1. Dry-Set Mortars and Grouts:
a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc.
b. Bostik construction Products Div.
c. DAP Inc. Div.; USG Corp.
d. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
2. Latex-Emulsion-Based Latex-Portland Cement Mortars:
a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc.
b. Bostik construction Products Div.
c. DAP Inc. Div.; USG Corp. _
d. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
3. Quarry Tile, Ceramic Tile.
a. American Olean Tile, Co., Inc.
b. Dal-Tile Corp.
c. Approved equal.
2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
2.3 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Unglazed Quarry Tile: Provide the complying with the following requirements:
1. Wearing Surface: Nonabrasive.
2. Nominal Facial Dimensions: As indicated.
3. Nominal Thickness: '/2 inch.
B. Glazed Wall Tile: Provide flat the complying with the following requirements:
1. Module Size: 4-1/4 by 4'/4 inches (108 by 108 mm).
C. .Trim Units: Provide the trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat the and to
comply with following requirements:
1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat the
where applicable.
2. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
a. Base for Thinset Mortar Installations: Coved.
TILE 09300 - 3
' PHASE 1
JOHNSON CREEK FACTORY SHOPPES
' JOHNSON CREEK, WISCONSIN
b. Tapered Transition Tile: Shape designed to effect transition between
~I' thickness of the floor and adjoining floor finishes of different thickness,
tapered to provide a reduction in thickness from '/Z inch to '/4 inch across
'i nominal 4 inch dimension.
I' 2.4 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1.
' B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, composition as follows:
1. Prepackaged dry mortar mix composed of portland cement, graded aggregate,
and the following dry polymer additive in the form of a reemulsifiable powder
' to which only water is added at job site.
a. Dry Polymer Additive: Manufacturer's standard.
2. Latex additive (water emulsion) of type described below, serving as replacement
for part of all of gauging water, combined at job site with prepackaged dry
' mortar mix supplied or specified by latex additive manufacturer.
a. Latex Type: Manufacturer's standard.
' C. Conductive D -Set Mortar: ANSI A118.2.
ry
2.5 GROUTING MATERIALS
' A. Dry-Set Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated.
B. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated, composition as
' follows:
1. Prepackaged dry grout mix composed of portland cement, graded aggregate, and
' the following dry polymer additive in the form of a reemulsifiable powder to
which only water is added at job site.
I' 2.6 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS
A. Provide cementitious backer units complying with ANSI Al 18.9, of thickness and
'~,' width indicated below, and in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt
joints.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), where indicated.
2. Width: Manufacturer's standard width, but not less than 32 inches (813 mm).
~i
j TILE ~ 09300 - 4
' PHASE 1
JOHNSON CREEK FACTORY SHOPPES
' JOHNSON CREEK, WISCONSIN
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cementitious backer
units that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
' 1. The Original Wonderboard; Custom Building Products.
2. Wonderboard Multi+Board; Custom Building Products.
' 3. DomCrete cementitious Tile-Backer Board; Domtar Gypsum.
4. UtiI-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board; FinPan, Inc.
5. DUROCK Cement Board; United States Gypsum Co.
2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
' A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and
manufacturers including those for accurate proportioning of materials, water, or
additive content; type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing
' containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortars and grouts of
uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and areas where the will be installed, with Installer present, for
' compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile.
' 1. Verify that substrates for setting the are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or
waxy films and curing compounds.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and
mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind the has been
completed before installing tile.
' B. Do not roceed with installation until unsatisfacto conditions have been corrected.
P rY
' 3.2 PREPARATION
A. Blending: For the exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample
submittals, verify that the has been blended in factory and packaged accordingly so
that the units taken form one package show that same range in colors as those taken
' from other packages and match approved samples. If not factory blended, either return
to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
TILE 09300 - 5
u
3.3
~i~
PHASE 1
JOHNSON CREEK FACTORY SHOPPES
JOHNSON CREEK, WISCONSIN
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with parts of ANSI 108 Series of the
installation standards included under "American National Standard Specifications for
the Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to type of setting and grouting materials
and methods indicated.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply
with TCA installation methods indicated.
C. Extend the work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a
complete covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown. Terminate work
neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint
alignments.
' D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of the without
marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of the abutting trim, finish, or
built-in items for straight aligned joints. fit the closely to electrical outlets, piping,
' fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
E. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay the in grid pattern. Align joints when
adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out the work and
center the fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to
' minimize the cutting. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise shown.
F. Layout the wainscots to next full the beyond dimensions indicated.
' G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including
control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting
materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw cut joints after installation of tiles.
1. Locate joints in the surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
' H. Grout the to com 1 with the re uirements of the followin installation standards:
pY q g
' 1. For ceramic the grouts (sand-portland cement, dry-set, commercial portland
cement, and latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.
' 3.4 FLOOR INSTALLATION METHODS
' A. Quarry Tile: Install the to comply with requirements indicated below for setting-bed
method, TCA installation method related to type of subfloor construction, and grout
type:
TILE 09300 - 6
PHASE 1
JOHNSON CREEK FACTORY SHOPPES
' JOHNSON CREEK, WISCONSIN
1 1. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5.
2. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5.
' a. .Concrete Subfloor, Interior: TCA F113.
' B. Wall Tile Installation: Install types of the designated for wall installations to comply
with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Wall Installation Schedule, including those
referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting-bed standards.
' 1. Install metal lath and scratch coat to walls to comply with ANSI A108.1A,
Section 4.1.
' 2. Joint Widths: Install the on walls with the following joint widths.
3. Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
' 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic the surfaces
' so they are free of foreign matter.
1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from the as soon as possible.
2. Unglazed the may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by the
and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but no sooner than 14 days after
installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures
from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after
cleaning.
B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped,.
' broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective the work.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to
' manufacturer and installer that ensures that the is without damage or deterioration at
time of Substantial Completion.
' 1. When recommended by the manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral
protective cleaner to completed the walls and floors. Protect installed the work
' with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent
staining, damage, and wear.
' 2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting
is completed.
TILE 09300 - 7
PHASE 1
JOHNSON CREEK FACTORY SHOPPES
JOHNSON CREEK, WISCONSIN
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner form the
surfaces.
END OF SECTION 09300
TILE
09300 - 8
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 09511 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes acoustical panel ceilings installed with exposed suspension
systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
1. Product data for each type of product specified.
2. Samples for verification purposes of each type of exposed finish required,
prepared on samples of size indicated below and of same thickness and material
indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes involve normal color and
texture variations, include sample sets showing full range of variations
expected.
a. 6-inch-square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE '
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully
completed acoustical ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicted
for Project.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and
complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A products.
a. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09511 - 1
PHASE 1
JOHNSON CREEK FACTORY SHOPPES
JOHNSON CREEK, WISCONSIN
' B. Single-Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling
unit from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.
' C. Single-Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension
system from a single source with resources to provide products of consist quality in
' appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.
1. Obtain suspension system from same manufacturer that produces acoustical
' ceiling units.
D. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units
' and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or
is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression
' system components (if any), and partition system (if any).
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store
them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from
moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a
' stabilized moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in
' any way.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
'
A. S ace Enclosure: Do not install interior acoustical ceilin s until s ace is enclosed and
p g p
' weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings
is complete, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously
maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.
' 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
' A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match
products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified
with appropriate labels.
1. Acoustical Ceilin Units: Furnish uantit of uno ened boxes.
g q Y P
~I~
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 2
PHASE 1
JOHNSON CREEK FACTORY SHOPPES
JOHNSON CREEK, WISCONSIN
2. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed
component equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Mineral Base Panels -Water Felted, with Painted Finish and Perforated and
Fissured Pattern, Non-Fire-Resistance Rated:
a. "Minaboard Cortega", Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. "Hytone Baroque", Celotex Corp.
c. "Omni Fissured", USG Interiors, Inc.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Non-Fire-Resistance-Rated Wide-Face Double-Web Steel Suspension Systems:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
c. National Rolling Mills, Inc.
d. USG Interiors, Inc.
2. Edge Moldings:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
c. Fry Reglet Corp.
d. National Rolling Mills, Inc.
e. USG Interiors, Inc.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS, GENERAL
A. Standard for Acoustical Ceiling Units: Provide manufacturers' standard units of
configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated
by reference to types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless
otherwise indicated.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 3
PHASE 1
JOHNSON CREEK FACTORY SHOPPES
JOHNSON CREEK, WISCONSIN
1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400 (Plenum mounting in
which face of test specimen is 15 3/4 inches (400 mm) away from the test
surface) per ASTM E 795.
B. Colors and Patterns: Provide products to match appearance characteristics indicated
under each product type.
2.3 MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Type, Form, and Finish: Provide Type III, Form 1 units per ASTM E 1264 with
painted finish that comply with pattern and other requirements indicated.
B. Fissured Pattern: Units matching pattern indicated by reference to manufacturers'
standard pattern designations, with other characteristics as follows:
1. Color: Match color indicated by reference to manufacturers' standard color
designations.
2. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.55.
3. Ceiling Sound Transmission Class: CSTC 25.
4. Edge Detail: Square.
5. Size: 24 inches by 48 inches by 5/8 inch.
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Standard for Metal Suspension Systems: Provide manufacturer's standard metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that
comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements.
B. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type
of system indicated.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM c 635, Table 1,
Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated.
D. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM a 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
1. Gage: Provide wire sized so that stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C
635, Table 1, Direct-Hung), will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide
not less than -.106-inch diameter (12 gage).
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 4
u
~~
n
n
0
PHASE 1
JOHNSON CREEK FACTORY SHOPPES
JOHNSON CREEK, WISCONSIN
E. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated, or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
F. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicted
or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that
fit type of edge detail and suspension system indicated.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling system attaches or abuts,
with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other
sections that affect installation and anchorage of ceiling system. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
' 3.2 PREPARATION
' A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border
widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-width units at borders
and comply with reflected ceiling plans.
' 3.3 INSTALLATION
' A. General: Install acoustical ceiling systems to comply with installation .standard
referenced below, per manufacturer's instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems.
Handbook".
1. Standard for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems: Comply with ASTM
C 636.
' 2. Standards for Installation of Ceilin Sus ension S stems: Com 1 with ASTM
g P Y pY
' C 636 and ASTM E 580.
B. Arrange acoustical amts and onent directionally patterned units m a manner shown by
' reflected ceiling plans.
C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows:
' 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects
within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling
' suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and
offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally
effective means.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 5
1
PHASE 1
' JOHNSON CREEK FACTORY SHOPPES
JOHNSON CREEK, WISCONSIN
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers at spacings required
to support standard suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or
equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to
support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards.
' 3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to
inserts, eyescrews, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate,
and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail due to
age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
1 4. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate
framing members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices that are
' secure and appropriate for structure to which hangers are attached as well as for
type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate
or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
' 6. Space hangers not more than 4'-0" o.c. along each member supported directly
from hangers, unless otherwise shown, and provide hangers not more than 8
inches from ends of each member.
' D. Install edge moldings of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units.
' 1. Screw-attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16 inches o.c. and not
more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to
' tolerance of 1/8 inch in ' 12'-0". Miter corners accurately and connect securer.
E. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed
by support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders
and at penetrations.
' 3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for. cleaning and
touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09511
' ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 6
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 09650 -RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to work of
this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of resilient flooring and accessories is shown on drawings and in schedules.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Provide each type of resilient flooring and accessories as produced by a
single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, and
leveling compounds.
1. Flame Spread: Not more than 75 per ASTM E 84.
2. Smoke Developed: Not more than 450 per ASTM E 84.
3. Smoke Density: Not more than 450 per ASTM E 662.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of resilient flooring
and accessory.
B. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit the following samples of each type, color
and pattern of resilient flooring required, showing full-range of color and pattern
variations.
1. Full-size the samples.
2. 6" x 9" samples of sheet flooring.
3. 2%2 long samples of resilient flooring accessories.
4. Welding beads for sheet flooring.
5. Other materials as requested.
C. Maintenance Instructions: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's recommended
maintenance practices for each type of resilient flooring and accessory required.
RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 1
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain minimum temperature of 65 degrees F (18 degrees) in spaces to receive
' resilient flooring for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for
not less than 48 hours after installation. Store resilient flooring materials in spaces
where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation.
Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) in areas
where work is completed.
' B. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including
painting, have been completed. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs
until the latter have been cured and are sufficiently dry to achieve bond with adhesive
1 as determined by resilient flooring manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture
test.
' PART 2 -PRODUCTS
' 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of
e the following:
1. Manufacturers of Vinyl composition Tile:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Azrock Floor Products Div., Azrock Industries, Inc.
' c. Kentile Floors, Inc.
d. Tarkett Inc.
2. Manufacturers of Vinyl Wall Base:
' a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Azrock Floor Products Div., Azrock Industries, Inc.
c. Kentile Floors, Inc.
' d. Tarkett Inc.
2.2 RESILIENT FLOORING COLORS AND PATTERNS
A. Provide multiple colors and patterns as indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, as
selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards.
' RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 2
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
2.3
TILE FLOORING
A. Vinyl Composition Tile: FS SS-T-312, Type IV; 12" x 12" unless otherwise
indicated, and as follows:
2.4
1. Composition 1 -asbestos-free.
2. Gage: 1/8".
ACCESSORIES
A. Vinyl Wall Base: Provide vinyl base. complying with FS SS-T-40, Type II, with
matching end stops and performed or molded corner units, and as follows:
1. Height: 4".
2. Thickness: 0.080" gage.
3. Style: Standard top-set cove at resilient flooring areas.
4. Style: Straight base without cove at carpet areas.
5. Finish: Matte.
B. Resilient Edge Strips: 1/8" thick, homogeneous. vinyl or rubber composition, tapered
or bullnose edge, color to match flooring, or as selected by Architect from standard
colors available; not less than 1"wide.
C. Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by flooring
manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions.
D. Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
E. Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex type as recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Require Installer to inspect subfloor surfaces to determine that they are satisfactory. a
satisfactory subfloor surface is defined as one that is smooth and free from cracks,
holes, ridges, coatings preventing adhesive bond, and other defects impairing
performance or appearance.
B. Perform bond and moisture tests on concrete subfloors to determine if surfaces are
sufficiently cured and dry as well as to ascertain presence of curing compounds.
RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 3
7
0
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
C. Do not allow resilient flooring work to proceed until subfloor surfaces are satisfactory.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare subfloor surfaces as follows:
1. Use leveling and patching compounds as recommended by resilient flooring
manufacturer for filling small cracks, holes and depressions in subfloors.
2. Remove coatings from subfloor surfaces that would prevent adhesive bond,
including curing compounds incompatible with resilient flooring adhesives,
paint, oils, waxes and sealers.
B. Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered, and inspect subfloor.
' C. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to
application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
' A. Install resilient flooring using method indicated in strict compliance with
manufacturer's printed instructions. Extend resilient flooring into toe spaces, door
reveals, and into closets and similar openings.
i
7
7
u
B. Scribe, cut, and f t resilient flooring to permanent fixtures, built-in furniture and
cabinets, pipes, outlets and permanent columns, walls and partitions.
C. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for
future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or
other non-permanent marking device.
D. Tightly cement resilient flooring to subbase without open cracks, voids, raising ,and
puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface
imperfections. Hand roll resilient flooring at perimeter of each covered area to assure
adhesion.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF TILE FLOORS
A. Lay the from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets,
so that the at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid
use of cut widths less than '/z the at room perimeters. Lay the square to room axis,
unless otherwise shown.
' RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 4
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
B. Match tiles for color and pattern by using the from cartons in same sequence as
' manufactured and packaged if so numbered. Cut the neatly around all fixtures.
Broken, cracked, chipped or deformed the are not acceptable.
1. Lay the with grain running in one direction.
' C. Adhere the flooring to substrates using full spread of adhesive applied in compliance
with flooring manufacturer's directions.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and other permanent fixtures in
' rooms or areas where base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable,
with preformed corner units, or fabricated from base materials with mitered or coped
inside corners. Tightly bond base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with
' continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces.
1. On masonry surfaces, or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top
' edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler
material.
' B. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive. Install
edging strips at edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
' A. Perform following operations immediately upon completion of resilient flooring:
1. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
2. Do not wash floor until time period recommended by resilient flooring
manufacturer has elapsed to allow resilient flooring to become well-sealed in
' adhesive.
' 3. Damp-mop floor being careful to remove black marks and excessive soil.
4. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using appropriate
cleaner recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer.
B. Protect flooring against damage during construction period to comply with resilient
' flooring manufacturer's directions.
RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 5
3.7
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1. Apply protective floor polish to resilient flooring surfaces free from soil, excess
adhesive or surface blemishes. Use commercially available metal cross-linked
acrylic product acceptable to resilient flooring manufacturer.
C. Clean resilient flooring not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections
intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Clean
resilient flooring by method recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer.
1. Strip protective floor polish, which was applied after completion of installation,
prior to cleaning.
2. Reapply floor polish (3 coats) after cleaning.
EXTRA STOCK
A. Deliver stock of maintenance materials to Owner. Furnish maintenance materials from
same manufactured lot as materials installed and enclosed in protective packaging with
appropriate identifying labels.
1. Tile Flooring: Furnish not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction
thereof, for each type, color, pattern and size installed.
END OF SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 6
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 09900 -PAINTING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 1, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:
1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces.
2. Exposed interior items and surfaces.
3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in
addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or
material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not
specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar
adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules
do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and
finishes available.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving" for traffic-marking paint.
2. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel.
3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal.
4. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and
frames.
5. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation for
gypsum board.
6. Division 9 Section "Wall Coverings" for substrate sealer under wall coverings.
PAINTING
09900 - 1
PHASEI
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
7. Divisions 15 and 16: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is specified in
Divisions 15 and 16, respectively.
1.3 DEFIl~TITIONS
A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when
measured at an 85-degree meter.
2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
3. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
4. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65
when measured at a 60-degree meter.
5. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.
1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate
each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application.
Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general
classification.
2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information,
including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each
coating material proposed for use.
3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local
regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed
painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this
Project with a record of successful in-service performance.
PAINTING 09900 - 2
C
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1
A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and
containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
' 2. .Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
' S. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions. _
7. Color name and number.
' 8. VOC content.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in awell-ventilated area at a
minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in
storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
' 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and
waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are
protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and
' application.
' 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
' surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (7.2 and 35 deg C).
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85
' percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp
or wet surfaces.
' 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be
painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by
' manufacturer during application and drying periods.
~'
PAINTING 09900 - 3
1
I
' 1.8
~~
EXTRA MATERIALS
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in
the quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed
containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra
materials to the Owner.
1. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with an additional 2 gal. of each material and color
applied.
' PART 2 -PRODUCTS
' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
' incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in the paint
schedules.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products in the
paint schedules.
' C. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint
schedules by use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore).
2. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG).
3. Pratt & Lambert, Inc. (P & L).
4. Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W).
5. Olympic Stain (OLY).
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
' A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat
materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing
and field experience.
' B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various
coating types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product
identification will not be acceptable.
1
PAINTING 09900 - 4
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate
' colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be
used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish
' manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed
substitutions.
' C. Colors: Match colors indicated by reference to manufacturer's color designations.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
' 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which
painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements.
n
iJ
~I
C~
1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and
conditions within a particular area.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information
on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over
substrates primed by others.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces,
lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If
removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items
removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of
substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease
before cleaning.
PAINTING 09900 - 5
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning
process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to
manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as
specified.
1. Provide bamer coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
' 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement
plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforc_ ed cement panel surfaces to be painted.
Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen
' as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve
curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.
' a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint
manufacturer.
' b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing
appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish
e paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not
paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in
manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers,
mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view
' smooth and dust off.
a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white
' shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying. primer. After
priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been
shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign
' substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the
Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations.
a. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged.
Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and
touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.
J
I' PAINTING 09900 - 6
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based
' solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment
from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
' D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
' 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free
of foreign materials and residue.
' 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as
required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary,
remove surface film and strain material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended
limits.
' 3.3 APPLICATION
' A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators
and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
' 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.
2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
' 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in
' fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar
components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain
the system integrity and provide desired protection.
5. Paint surfaces behind movable e ui ment and furniture the same as similar
q p
' exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces
behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
' 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible
through registers or grilles.
' 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged. covers to match
exposed surfaces.
PAINTING 09900 - 7
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
' 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
' otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before
subsequent surface deterioration.
1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of
' application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has
.cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a
' smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand
between applications. _
' 2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply
' additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give
special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners
' receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not
recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel
sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of
paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
' h
er
C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or ot
applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.
'
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of
appropriate size for the surface or item being painted.
' '
s wool as
2. Rollers: Use rollers of c et, velvet back, or hi h- ile sheep
~P g P
recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended
' by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
' recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system
as recommended by the manufacturer.
' E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited
to items exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.
PAINTING 09900 - 8
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
F. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure
complete coverage with pores filled.
' G. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as
recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished
and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where
evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat
with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
' H. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a
smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness,
spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections
' will not be acceptable.
I. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,
' refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.
' 3.4 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other
discarded paint materials from the site.
1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove
' spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage
adjacent finished surfaces.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting.
' Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by
Architect.
i
n
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary
protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting
operations.
1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore
damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in
PDCA P1.
PAINTING 09900 - 9
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Elastomeric, High-Build, Acrylic Polymer Coating: 2 coats (smooth texture) with
a total film thickness not less than 19.8 Mils.
B. Wood:
1. Stain Finish: 2 coats semi-transparent oil stain with satin finish.
C. EIFS Accent Colors:
1. Flat Finish: 2 coats.
a. .First Coat: Exterior Acrylic Emulsion (FS TT-P-19).
b. Second Coat: Exterior Acrylic Emulsion (FS TT-P-19).
D. Zinc-Coated Metal:
1. Semi-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: 2 finish coats over primer.
a. Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer (FS TT-P-641).
b. First Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel (FS TT-E-489).
c. Second Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel (FS TT-E-489).
3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Gypsum Drywall Systems:
1. Latex Eggshell Enamel Finish: 3 coats with total dry film thickness not less than
2.5 mils.
a. Primer: Interior Latex-Based White Primer (FS TT-P-650).
b. First Coat: Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel (FS TT-E-509).
c. Second Coat: Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel (FS TT-E-509).
B. Ferrous Metal:
1. Semigloss Enamel Finish: 2 coats over primer with total dry film thickness not
less than 2.5 mils.
a. Primer: Synthetic rust-inhibiting primer (FS TT-P-664).
PAINTING 09900 - 10
' PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat (FS TT-E-543).
' c. Finish Coat: Interior semigloss odorless alkyd enamel (FS TT-E-509).
' END OF SECTION 09900
t
1
PAINTING 09900 - 11
i
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 10155 -TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes stock, manufactured toilet compartments.
B. Types of toilet compartments include:
1. Plastic laminate finish.
C. Styles of toilet compartments include:
1. Floor-anchored, overhead-braced.
D. Styles of screens include:
1. Wall-hung.
E. Toilet accessories, such as toilet paper holders, grab bars, and dispensers, are specified
in another Division 10 Section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for materials, fabrication, and installation including catalog cuts of
anchors, hardware, fastenings, and accessories.
C. Shop drawings for fabrication and erection of toilet compartment assemblies not fully
described by product drawings, templates, and instructions for installation of
anchorage devices built into other work.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10155- 1
0
1.4
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings
and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of work. However, allow for
adjustments where taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay work.
' B. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be built into other work for
installation of toilet compartments and related items. Coordinate delivery with other
work to avoid delay.
' PART 2 -PRODUCTS
' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufactures
' offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
t 1. Plastic Laminate:
a. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
' b. Global Steel Products Corp.
c. Knickerbocker Partition Corp.
d. Monarch Toilet Partitions, Inc.
' e. Sanymetal Products Corp.
f. WeislRobart Partitions, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
' A. General: Provide materials which have been selected for surface flatness aid
smoothness. Exposed surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections on finished units
' are not acceptable.
B. Plastic Laminate: NEMA Std. LD-3, minimum 0.050 inch thick, color and pattern as
indicated or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect from plastic laminate
manufacturer's standards.
' C. Core Material for Plastic Laminate: Manufacturer's standard plywood or particleboard
in thickness to provide nominal dimension of 1 inch minimum for all components.
D. Pilaster Shoes and Caps: ASTM A 167, Type 302/304 stainless steel, not less than 3
inches high, 0.0396 inch thick (20 gage), finished to match hardware.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 2
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
E. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design for attaching panels to walls and
pilasters, either chromium-plated nonferrous cast alloy ("Zamac") or anodized
aluminum.
' F. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy duty operating
hardware and accessories ofchromium-plated, nonferrous cast alloy ("Zamac").
' G. Overhead Bracing: Continuous extruded aluminum, antigrip profile, with clear
anodized finish.
'
s standard exposed fasteners of stainless
H. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer
steel, chromium-plated steel, or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-
' type heads and nuts. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized, cadmium-plated,
or other rust-resistant protective-coated steel.
' 2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Furnish standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for
compartment system. Furnish units with cutouts, drilled holes, and internal
reinforcement to receive partition-mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as
indicated.
B. Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 24-inch-wide in-swinging
' doors for ordinary toilet stalls and 32-inch-wide (clear opening) out-swinging doors for
stalls equipped for use by handicapped.
' C. Plastic Laminate Compartments and Screens: Pressure-laminate one-piece face sheets
to core material with no splices or joints and with edges straight and sealed. Seal
exposed core material at cutouts to protect against moisture.
u
1
D. Overhead-Braced Compartments: Furnish galvanized steel supports and leveling bolts
at pilasters as recommended by manufacturer to suit floor conditions. Make provisions
for setting and securing continuos, extruded, aluminum, antigrip, overhead bracing at
top of each pilaster. Provide shoe at each pilaster to conceal supports and leveling
mechanism.
E. Wall-Hung Screens: Furnish panel units in sizes indicated, of same construction and
finish as partition system panels.
F. Hardware: Furnish hardware for each compartment to comply with ANSI A 117.1 for
handicapped accessibility and as follows:
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 3
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
' ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
1. Hinges: cutout inset type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90
degrees. Provide gravity type, spring-action cam type, or concealed torsion rod
type to suit manufacturer's standards.
' 2. Latch and Keeper: Recessed latch unit, designed for emergency access, with
combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper.
' 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard unit, combination hook and rubber-tipped
bumper, sized to prevent door hitting mounted accessories.
' 4. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit for out-swinging doors. Provide pulls
on both faces of handicapped compartment doors.
' 2.4 FII~TISH
' A. Color: See Room Finish Schedule.
' PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
' A. General: Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation
sequence. Install compartment units rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide
' clearances of not more than %Z inch between pilasters and panels, and not more than 1
inch between panels and walls. Secure panels to walls with not less than two stirrup
brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so that holes for
wall anchors occur in masonry or the joints. Secure panels to pilasters with not less
than two stirrup brackets located to align with stirrup brackets at wall. Secure. panels
in position with manufacturer's recommend anchoring devices.
' B. Overhead-Braced Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and
tighten installation with devices furnished. Secure overhead brace to each pilaster with
' not less than two fasteners. Hang doors and adjust so that tops of doors are parallel
with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.
' C. Screens: Attach with anchoring devices as recommended by manufacturer to suit
supporting structure. Set unit sot provide support and to resist lateral impact.
u
u
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 4
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Set hinges
on in-swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees form closed position
when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors (and entrance swing doors) to
return to fully closed position.
B. Clean exposed surfaces of partition systems using materials and methods
recommended by manufacturer, and provide protection as necessary to prevent damage
during remainder of construction period.
END OF SECTION 10155
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10155 - 5
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 10425 -SIGNS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including. General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of signs:
1. Exterior identification signage.
2. Interior identification signage.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to
materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and
large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds,
layout, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Reflective vinyl die cut 1 %i" letters mounted inside all storefront doors to read from the
outside, indicating each tenant space number.
B. Outside reflective vinyl die cut 4" letters mounted on each back door indicating space
number and tenant name.
C. Outdoor reflective vinyl die cut 4" letters mounted on back doors of common areas
(utility, office, storage, etc.).
D. Indoor engraved plastic laminate signs in common areas (men's and women's restroom,
office, utility, janitor, storage, etc.).
SIGNS
10425 - 1
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
E. Utility meter signs to be on all gas, electric and water meters that are remote from tenant
space shall have engraved plastic laminate signs.
F. Any other signage as required by any governing authority.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of
the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from
distortion or other defects in appearance.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's
instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 10425
SIGNS
10425 - 2
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 10550 -POSTAL SPECIALTIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following postal specialties:
1. Horizontal mailboxes.
2. Parcel lockers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data consisting of manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for
postal specialty units required.
1. Provide manufacturer's certification that equipment proposed conforms to U.S.
Postal Service (LISPS) regulations and has been approved by the Postmaster
General.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Where mail system is served by U.S. Postal Service (LISPS), provide products approved
by the LISPS.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. Horizontal and Vertical Mailboxes and Parcel Lockers:
POSTAL SPECIALTIES
10550 - 1
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
a. American Device Mfg. Co.
b. Bommer Industries, Inc.
c. Florence Manufacturing Co.
d. Jensen (A Nortek Co.).
2.2 METALS AND FII~tISHES
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper best suited for the intended use and finish indicated.
1. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), mill finish, where not exposed.
2. Extruded Bar and Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
3. Exposed Finish: Manufacturer's standard matching following BHMA or US
finish according to ANSUBHMA A156.18.
a. Satin Aluminum, Clear Anodized: BHMA No. 628 (US28)
2.3 HORIZONTAL MAILBOXES
A. General: Provide horizontal-type mailbox units in size and with features indicated.
B. Front-Loading Door: Manufacturer's standard unit braced and framed to hold box doors
in master front. Construct continuous stainless-steel piano hinge on one side, and solid
closure for back of mail compartments. Fabricate unit so that door remains open while
mail is deposited.
1. Locking: Construct unit to receive locking unit provided by local postmaster for
use by letter carriers.
2. Identification: Plastic tabs with heat-stamped numbers, as designated by Owner
on each door. For sorting, provide slots and clear plastic openings to receive
tenants' name cards.
3. Locking: A five-pin tumbler, cylinder lock capable of at least 1000 key changes,
with two keys for each box door. Key each box differently and deliver keys to
Owner with record of each corresponding lock and key numbers.
2.4 PARCEL LOCKERS
A. General: Provide parcel locker units in size and type indicated. Comply with USPS
Publication 15 and Publication 18 for indoor units.
POSTAL SPECIALTIES
10550 - 2
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
B. Compartment: Manufacturer's standard design fabricated of aluminum or galvanized
steel with finish matching compartment door finish.
C. Quantity
1. (4) 13"w x 11"h.
2. (1) 13"w x 22"h.
3. (1) 13"w x 33"h.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations for preparing substrate, installing anchors, and
applying postal specialties units.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install units to comply with manufacturer's instructions and final drawings.
1. Final acceptance is contingent upon compliance with USPS requirements.
END OF SECTION 10550
POSTAL SPECIALTIES
10550 - 3
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
SECTION 10800 -TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Division 1, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following toilet accessory items:
1. Paper towel dispenser/disposal.
2. Grab bars.
3. Mirrors.
4. Feminine napkin dispensers.
5. Electric hand dryers.
6. Toilet paper holders.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of contract and Division
1 Specifications Sections.
B. Product data for each toilet accessory item specified, including details of construction
relative to materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, method of mounting, specified
options, and finishes.
C. Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations (by room) for
each toilet accessory item to be provided for project.
D. Setting Drawings: Where cutouts are required in other work, provide templates,
substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and for
installation of anchorage devices.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in
concrete or built into masonry; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10800 - 1
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of
accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise
acceptable to Architect.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other
work to avoid interference and to assure proper installation, operation, adjustment,
cleaning, and servicing of toilet accessory items.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Project Warranty: Provide manufacturer's written 5-year warranty against
silver spoilage of mirrors, agreeing to replace any mirrors that develop visible defects
within warranty period.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering toilet accessories that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. American Specialties, Inc.
2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
3. Bradley Corporation.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Stainless Steel: AISI type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, 22-gage (.034-inch)
minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Mirror Glass: Nominal 6.0 mm (0.23 inch) thick, conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type
I, class 1, Quality q2, and with silvering, electro-plated copper coating, and protective
organic coating.
C. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
D. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit or of
galvanized steel where concealed.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10800 - 2
i
2.3 PRODUCTS
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
A. Paper Towel Dispenser/Disposal: Bradley #238, recessed.
B. Grab Bars: Bradley #812, concealed mounting, safety finish.
C. Mirrors (tenant toilets): Bradley #700, angle frame.
D. Mirrors (public toilets): Wall to wall, angle frame top and bottom.
L
Li
n
n
i
u
n
E. Feminine Napkin Dispenser: Bradley #427.
F. Electric Hand Dryers: Bradley #2870.
G. Toilet Paper Dispenser: ASI #04692.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: No names or labels are permitted on exposed faces of toilet and bath
accessory units. On either interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface,
provide identification of each accessory item by either a printed, waterproof label or a
stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.
B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated,
fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access
panels with continuos stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage
wherever possible.
C. Framed Mirror Units, General: Fabricate frames for glass mirror units to
accommodate wood, felt, plastic, or other glass edge protection material. Provide
mirror backing and support system that will permit rigid,. tamperproof glass installation
and prevent accumulation of moisture, as follows:
1. Provide galvanized steel backing sheet, not less than 22 gage (.034 inch) and
full mirror size, with nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not
as acceptable filler material.
D. Mirror Unit Hangers: Provide system of mounting mirror units that will permit rigid,
tamperproof, and the theftproof installation, as follows:
1. One-piece galvanized steel wall hanger device with spring action locking
mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 3
s
PHASE I
MINNEAPOLIS OUTLET CENTER
ALBERTVILLE, MINNESOTA
2. Heavy-duty wall brackets of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking
devices requiring special tool to remove.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install toilet accessories as herein specified and also units supplied by Owner in
accordance with manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate
and recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units to plumb and level, firmly
anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle
bolts, or screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions for type of substrate involved.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function
smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items.
B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces in strict accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations after removing temporary labels and protective coatings.
END OF SECTION 10800
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10800 - 4
' PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
DIVISION 15000 -MECHANICAL
1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The provisions of the Agreement between Owner and Design/Builder of this
' specification shall apply to all work of this section.
B. The work of all sections 15000 through 15990 shall be performed under one
' subcontract agreement.
' C. The general provisions in Division 1 shall apply to this Section.
2.0 CODES AND PERMITS
' 2.1 Design and install all mechanical work in accordance with the latest regulations of
the Uniform Mechanical Code and all other applicable codes, laws regulations,
' and local code enforcement officials.
A. Any and all work necessary, whether it is shown or specified, shall be
provided if it is required by the applicable codes and/or the local building
inspection authorities.
B. Requirements of the applicable codes and regulations shall be considered
as minimum safety requirements, and criteria in this specification which.
' exceeds code requirements shall take precedence.
'
2.2 ect shall be ISO. This
The insurance underwritin authori for this ro
g ~' p J
Contractor shall take all action required for ISO approval.
2.3 Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses, fees, etc., required by governing agencies
' prior to commencement of work. Upon completion of work, obtain all necessary
inspections, approvals and written acceptance from the proper governing agencies
having jurisdiction.
2.4 Submit certified mechanical drawings and specifications to the building officials
with permit applications.
'
2.5 The Subcontractor shall obtain tem or certificates if necessary. He shall
P ~'Y
obtain a final certificate of inspection, without reservations, from the respective
' inspection department when all the work has been complete, tested and placed
into operation.
3.0 CERTIFYING ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
Page 1 of 33
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
3.1 Review and sign all design drawings and specifications, and provide periodic site
observations to certify that the work conforms to the drawings and specifications.
3.2 At the time of completion, certify that the project has been constructed
substantially in accordance with the design drawings and submittals.
SECTION 01010 -SUMMARY OF WORK
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 Provide all design, certified drawings, labor, equipment, materials and services as
required for a complete operating mechanical system in accordance with the
contract documents and all accordance with the contract documents and all
applicable code requirements and restrictions.
2.0 BASE BUILDING
2.1 The base building work shall include the following:
A. Design all Plumbing, HVAC, and Sprinkler Systems.
B. Sanitary sewer, wall hydrants, water service entrance and water service to
each tenant roof drainage connected to the storm sewer, toilet room
fixtures, water heaters and installation.
C. Installation of the rooftop units with gas piping and ducts mans, trunks and
diffusers.
D. Toilet and equipment room heating and exhaust.
E. Complete sprinkler distribution system for all areas.
3.0 TENANT FINISHES
3.1 Tenant space mechanical work will be completed in addition to the standard
tenant fit-up work included with the base building work, shall be on a per unit
price, or negotiated basis. See Section 01026 for unit prices. Full certified
mechanical design drawings and submittals will be required on all individual
tenant spaces mechanical work.
Page 2 of 33
i~
f
~~
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
SECTION 01027 -APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
1.0 SUBCONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
1.1 The Subcontractor shall provide a complete detailed cost breakdown, quantity,
labor and material, in the manner and form required by the General Contractor for
accounting and monthly progress payment purposes. Successful bidder shall
submit the required cost breakdown prior to award of the Subcontractor.
1.2 Final payment will not be made until after the final inspection and acceptance of
the work by the Owner.
1.3 The Subcontractor shall be responsible to the General Contractor for the design
and installation of the mechanical work•to satisfy the contractual responsibilities
of the General Contractor to the Owner. No payment will be made to the
Subcontractor for extra work unless said extra work is authorized by the Owner
and/or the General Contractor.
SECTION 01030 -ALTERNATES
1.0 SPECIFIED ALTERNATES
1.1 The Mechanical Subcontractor shall submitbids on all specified alternates. Base
bids will not be considered without alternate bids.
2.0 VOLUNTARY ALTERNATES
2.1 Voluntary alternates will be considered only at the time of bidding.
SECTION 01040 -PROJECT COORDINATION
1.0 PROJECT COORDINATION
1.1 Coordinate the mechanical design and installation with the work of all other
' trades.
1.2 In case of conflict, the General Contractor/Owner shall decide the proper location
1 or layout, and any costs of revisions shall be at the expense of the Subcontractor
responsible for the work.
1.3 The Mechanical Contractor is responsible for all coordination and fees related to
utility company connections.
Page 3 of 33
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
' SE('TION 01045 -CUTTING AND PATCHING
1.0 CUTTING AND PATCHING
1.1 All holes of area less than 150 square inches required through concrete floors,
' precast concrete, masonry, etc., shall be provided by the Mechanical
Subcontractor, the exact location of each hole is subject to the approval of the
General Contractor. All holes required through the roof, and all other holes
' required to be larger than 150 square inches shall be provided by he General
Contractor at the direction of this Subcontractor, with the approval of the General
' Contractor.
1.2 Any cutting and patching for holes where information on sizes and locations is not
' provided to the General Contractor in a timely manner shall be the responsibility
of the Subcontractor.
' 1.3 All cutting and patching shall be subject to the direction and approval of .the
General Contractor. The Subcontractor shall not endanger the stability of the
structure by cutting, digging, etc., and shall not cut or alter the work of any other
Contractor.
SECTION 01300 -SUBMITTALS
' 1.0 DESIGN DRAWINGS AND E UIPMENT DATA
Q
1.1 Design:
A. Within thirty (30) days after award, furnish complete, easily readable,
certified mechanical design drawings including, but not limited to, the
detailed design, sizing, location, equipment schedule, roof top unit
schedule, and installation of all equipment, specialties, etc. These design
drawings shall be complete including, but not limited to, duct .sizes,
register, grille and diffuser sizes, models and CFM ratings, piping sizes,
' equipment identification, input capacities, horsepower, riser diagrams, etc.
Sample tenant layouts are included in these specifications.
B. The design drawings are required to be updated throughout the project to
include floor plan revisions mainly for tenant layout. AutoCad files will
be provided by the Architect for base drawings and revisions.
1.2 The mechanical drawings and all design calculations shall be certified by a
Mechanical Engineer, registered in the state in which the work is to be performed.
Page 4 of 33
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
1.3 Consult the complete drawings and specifications to determine and provide for the
mechanical requirements of work provided by others including, but not limited to,
the Electrical Subcontractor.
A. If clarifications. to the specifications are required to document interface
with this Subcontractor, provide such clarification prior to entering into a
subcontract.
B. Later claims for labor, materials, equipment and work required for any
difficulty encountered shall not be recognized, and all such difficulties
shall be resolved by this Subcontractor at his sole expense.
2.0 EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS -
2.1 Review and approve all submittals prior to submitting them to the General
Contractor.
2.2 Provide the following submittals for approval within thirty (30) calendar days
after contract award:
A. Preliminary plumbing, HVAC equipment, ductwork and fire protection
sprinkler layouts.
B. Locations and sizes of all sleeves and penetrations through concrete walls,
floors, and roof for power roof ventilators, louvers, drains, etc.
C. Locations and weights of all equipment.
D. A list of proposed Subcontractors and material manufacturers.
E. Equipment brochures and electrical power requirements for all proposed
equipment, pumps, water heaters, cooling towers, heat pumps, etc.
2.3 Provide the following submittals for approval within thirty (30) calendar days
after contract award:
A. One reproducible set of 100% complete and certified mechanical design
drawings.
B. Seven (7) sets of shop drawings of all equipment including, but not limited
to:
1. Equipment brochures.
2. Control wiring diagrams and sequence of operation.
Page 5 of 33
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHAI~TICAL CRITERIA
3. Electrical power requirements.
I1
~~
0
u
J
4. Shop drawings of all fixtures, registers, grilles, and other
requirements.
5. Other information or samples of equipment being used, or included
as selected options.
C. Calculations including, but not limited to, load calculations, pressure drop
calculations for air and water, plus other design data.
D. Schedule of mechanical work •on project including delivery dates of
equipment and fixtures.
2.4 Shop drawings submitted for approval by the Contractor/Owner shall include the
following:
A. The Mechanical Contractor's stamp of approval.
B. Detailed custom information.
C. All features and options clearly indicated.
D. Wiring diagrams (custom) for all systems.
E. The Certifying Engineer's stamp of approval.
2.5 Obtain approval of submittals before beginning work. No payments will be made
until all design drawings, calculations, and required submittals are approved by
the Owner. Any work started before receiving approval on any of this data will be
at the Subcontractor's risk and expense.
2.6 Any changes shall be submitted to the Owner for approval prior to performing the
work. Any deviations from approved submittal data without the approval of the
Owner shall be at the Subcontractor's risk and expense.
SECTION 01700 -PROJECT CLOSE-OUT
1.0 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
1.1 As the work progresses, record all changes from the installation originally
indicated on the design drawings. Upon completion of the project and prior to
receipt of final payment, add these revisions to the original drawings, or if no
revisions were made in the work, note that on the drawings. In either case, the
drawings should be labeled as "record drawings", approved by the Mechanical
Engineer originally certifying the drawings, and submitted to the General
Contractor.
Page 6 of 33
' PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
' 2.0 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
' 2.1 At the completion of all work, furnish three (3) complete manuals describing the
construction, guarantees, operation, and maintenance of the mechanical system
installed under this subcontract agreement. Equipment data sheets are to be
marked to indicate model numbers, options, operating points, etc., with all non-
essential data to be marked as such. These manuals shall include all test and
balance reports, and the statements of all warranties on pumps, compressors, heat
' exchangers, etc. Provide a list of names and addresses of the nearest supply
houses carrying spare parts for all equipment furnished. Provide a written
description of system operation and procedures, including a sequence of operation
and points of control, and a schedule of recommended preventative maintenance.
This material shall be submitted to the General Contractor.
' 3.0 MANUFACTURER' S INSTRUCTIONS
' 3.1 Manufactured materials specified or shown on the drawings shall be applied or
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's direction, recommendations of an
association dealing primarily with the materials and in accordance with the
' specifications or the drawings. Conflicts shall be resolved in a manner which
preserves all manufacturer's warranties.
' 4.0 INSTRUCTIONS TO THE PROPERTY MANAGER
4.1 Instruct the Property Manager in the proper operation and maintenance of all
1 systems and equipment and explain all warranties, all in the presence of the
Contractor's Engineer.
' S.0 OPERATIONAL CHECK
' S.1 An operational check of the entire system shall be made in the presence of the
Owner's Engineer. All equipment and systems shall be checked at the time for
proper operation and control, and any deficiencies shall be corrected by the
' Subcontractor.
6.0 CLEAN-UP
6.1 Clean up work areas daily and clear away from the job site all debris, surplus
material, etc., resulting from the work of this section, leaving the job and
' equipment in a clean condition.
6.2 At the end of construction, thoroughly clean all pieces of mechanical equipment,
leaving the installation in a first class condition acceptable to the General
Contractor.
Page 7 of 33
' PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
SECTION 01740 -WARRANTIES AND BONDS
' 1.0 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
1.1 Guarantee all materials and equipment installed under this subcontract against
' defects in workmanship and materials for a period of twelve (12) months after
final acceptance of the work by the Owner. Repair and/or replace any materials or
equipment developing such defects within that time promptly upon due notice
given by the Owner, at no additional expense to the Owner.
e 1.2 All equipment bearing a manufacturer's guarantee shall be construed as an
extended guarantee to the Owner by the Manufacturers. Any such equipment that
proves to be defective in materials of workmanship within the guarantee penod is
' to be replaced by the Subcontractor in accordance with the manufacturer's
guarantee at no additional expense to the Owner.
' 1.3 The Subcontractor shall provide instructions and equipment starting service for
one (1) complete year after the date of substantial completion at no additional
expense to the Owner.
SECTION 15500 -HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
1.0 GENERAL
' 1.1 The heating, ventilating, and air conditioning system shall consist of the
following:
u
~~~
n
A. Heating at areas with overhead doors shall be gas fired propeller type unit
heaters.
B. Heating, ventilating and air conditioning for each tenant area shall be by
means of a packaged heating, ventilating and air conditioning unit(s),
having direct expansion cooling coils, air cooled condensing units and gas
fired heating sections. Air distribution shall be by overhead supply duct
systems with ceiling supply air registers and diffusers, and return air
grilles in the ceiling return air plenum. The size, quantity and location of
diffusers and means of distribution shall be the responsibility of the
Subcontractor.
C. Public areas such as comdors, toilets, and lobbies shall be provided with.
conditioned air unless noted otherwise.
D. Exhaust, fresh air, and relief systems (with acoustically lined transfer
ducts) as required.
Page 8 of 33
i
u
ii
0
I~
u
u
0
J
u
u
u
u
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHAI~IICAL CRITERIA
E. Exhaust shall be provided from each toilet room.
F. Electric heating units shall be provided in all entrance vestibules and
toilets with an exterior wall. Provide electric heating units in water
entrance and storage/utility rooms. (Electric heating units shall be
installed by the Electrical Contractor under the coordination of the
Mechanical Contractor.)
G. All office (landlord) and common areas shall be heated and air conditioned
unless noted otherwise.
H. All equipment ductwork, etc., shill be selected and laid out to fit in spaces
allowed with ample space provided for proper maintenance, filter changes,
etc.
I. Fire Stopping: All penetrations of smoke or fire-rated assemblies shall be
restored to the integrity of the original assembly using an approved (by he
building inspector) fire-stopping system.
J. Entry of Large Equipment:
1. The Subcontractor shall be solely responsible for all costs to
provide access of equipment, or for obtaining equipment in
sections small enough to pass through permanent building
entrances.
K. Protection and Storage of Equipment and Materials:
1. Protect all material and equipment against weather elements,
construction damage, dirt, dust, paint, etc.
2. All major materials and equipment shall be stored off of the site,
with only sufficient amounts being delivered to the site for the
immediate work schedule. Arrangements shall be made with the
General Contractor for storage of on-site materials and their
location(s).
L. Mount equipment such that satisfactory and adequate clearance to
electrical and mechanical components is available.
M. All filters are to be changed within four (4) weeks of tenant opening.
Page 9 of 33
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
2.0 MECHANICAL DESIGN CRITERIA
2.1 Mechanical design criteria shall be based upon the following:
A. Design Temperatures -Indoor
1. Summer 75.0 degrees F DB
62.4 degrees F WB (50% RH)
2. Winter 72.0 degrees F DB
B. Design Temperatures -Outdoor
1. Summer design temperatures shall be based on ASHRAE data for
2% risk (deviation) coverage for the city of which the project is
located in.
2. Winter design temperature shall be 99% coverage for the city in
which the project is located in. (The specific design temperatures
can be found in the ASHR.AE Handbook).
C. Internal Load Data
1. 100 sq. ft. net area per person in tenant areas.
2. 4 watts/sq. ft. for lighting in tenant areas.
3. 1 watt/sq. ft. for equipment in tenant areas.
4. 10 cfin/person outside air.
5. 1 cfm/sq. ft. of air conditioning in toilets.
6. 2 cfm/sq. ft. of exhaust in toilets.
a. Net area for these calculations shall be the total floor area,
less all shafts, stairwells toilet rooms, and
mechanicaUelectrical equipment rooms.
7. Unit size shall not be less than one (1) ton per 400 sq. ft. per tenant
space.
Page 10 of 33
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
' SECTION 15020 -BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
' 1.0 GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1 All materials shall be new, of good commercial quality, and made by approved
i manufacturers. Materials and installation shall conform to all applicable codes
and regulations.
' 2.0 PIPING
' 2.1 All piping in finished areas shall be concealed unless otherwise indicated. Piping
shall be installed so as to avoid interference with the lighting, ductwork, heat
pumps, structure, equipment, etc. ~ Any exposed vertical piping shall be run as
' tight as possible to the walls or columns, and locations shall be subject to the
approval of the Owner. Provide chrome plated escutcheons where pipes pass
through finished walls, partitions, floors, or ceiling.
2.2 Pi in assin throu h floors and walls shall be sleeved or protected by resilient
p gp g g
material. Sleeves and non-combustible resilient annular packing shall be used
' where piping passes through fire separations, or as required by the local
inspection authorities. All voids around pipes and ducts through fire rated
separations shall be filled with the General Contractor approved fire-stopping
material. Underground piping penetrating floors and walls enclosing building
space shall be sleeved and provided with a watertight seal equivalent to Lins-Seal
' by Thunderline Corporation.
3.0 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
' 3.1 Provide all excavating and backfilling necessary for the complete mechanical
installation.
3.2 Excavate trenches to required grade and depth with only sufficient material
removed to provide working space. Trenches excavated below required depth
' shall be refilled to proper depth with compacted sand. Trenches shall be stored
and sheet piled as necessary to prevent caving in, or endangering the work of
others. The Subcontractor shall be held solely responsible for damage caused by
1 his work.
3.3. No piping, etc., shall be laid in water. Furnish all pumping equipment, power,
' temporary connections, etc., and do all pumping necessary for removal of ground
or other water.
1
u
' Page 1.1 of 33
0
l
n
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
3.4 Backfill inside the building and outside the building under bituminous or concrete
surfaces shall be granule materials, free from large stones and organic and
perishable materials. Place all Backfill in 6" layers and compact thoroughly to
95% of maximum modified Proctor density before placing succeeding layers.
Carry Backfill to established grade elevations. Backfill material at unimproved
areas may be material form the site, free from large stones and other objectionable
material. Correct any detrimental settlement of any surface.
SECTION 15030 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS OF MECHANICAL
EQUIPMENT
1.0 Verify line voltage for specific project site (3 phase, 4 wire). All mechanical equipment
shall be suitable for use with the line voltage electrical service, except that motors 1/3 HP
and less maybe 120 volt, single phase. Where mechanical equipment is not available in
the specified voltage, the Subcontractor shall provide a transformer with adequate
capacity for the unit being served.
2.0 All motors shall be high efficiency models selected for the specific applications so as to
never operate within the service factor range.
3.0 The Subcontractor shall provide all starters complete with the overload and low voltage
protection, when started with and located at the equipment and all remote push-buttons,
control devices, relays, auxiliary contacts, etc., required for his equipment to utilize the
line voltage service specified. All starters shall include hand-off-auto switches.
4.0 Responsibility: Unless otherwise indicated all motors and controls for Division 15
equipment shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following
schedule:
ITEM
J
u
Set In Power Control
Furnished Place Wiring Wiring
Under Under Under Under
Division ivisi Division ivision
Equipment Motors 15 15 16
Starters/Contractors:
Separate 15 16 16 15
Factory Mounted
and Wired 15 15 16 15
Push-button Stations:
1 Page 12 of 33
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
Separates 15 16 15
In Starter Enclosure 15 16 15
Disconnect Switches 16 16 16
Thermal Overload Switches 16 16 16
Manual Operating Switches 16 16 16
Control Relays 15 15 15
Control Transformers 15 16 16 15
Line Voltage Thermostat 15 15 15
Low Voltage Thermostat 15 15 15
Sub-Base Low Voltage 15 15 15
Time Switches Not In
Control Panel 15 15 16 15
Thermostat and Controls Integral
with Equipment of Directly
Attached to Ducts, Pipes, etc. 15 15 15
Equipment in Temperature
Control Panels 15 15 15
Valve Motors, Damper Motors,
Solenoid Valves, etc. 15 15 15 ,
Control Circuit Outlets 16 16 16
Smoke Detectors Including
Relays for Fan Control 16 15 16 16
Equipment Interlocks 15 15 15
5.0 Control Wiring:
A. Consists of wiring in pilot circuits of contractors, starters, relays, etc., and wiring
for valve and damper operators.
Page 13 of 33
' PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
B. For single phase devices where power current passes through controller, .wiring
between controller and device shall be considered control wiring; wiring to device
from electrical panel shall be considered power wiring.
6.0 Wiring shall be adequately supported above the ceilings and shall not be supported by the
' ceiling grid system,- ceiling tile, lighting fixtures, mechanical equipment, piping or
ductwork hangers.
' 7.0 The Electrical Subcontractor will provide separate disconnect switches for each piece of
equipment (except where specified to be provided with the equipment), and line voltage
power wiring to the disconnect switch, the starter and the unit. Units having integral
disconnect switches will have line voltage power wiring by the Electrical Subcontractor.
8.0 The Electrical Subcontractor under the supervision of the Mechanical Subcontractor shall
be responsible to see that the rotation of all three phase motors for mechanical equipment
is in the correct direction prior to equipment operation.
' 9.0 The Subcontractor shall have the responsibility to provide the adequate rough-in
information to the Electrical Subcontractor. Any costs, such as patching and refinishing
' walls, resulting from inadequate information shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical
Subcontractor.
1 10.0 Refer to the Electrical Specifications for the availability of temporary electrical power.
11.0 Electric Heating Units:
A. Electric baseboard heaters shall be commercial grade equivalent to Market, Berko,
' or Singer, complete with built-in tamperproof thermostat and all necessary
operating and safety controls.
' B. Electric cabinet heaters shall be commercial grade equivalent to Market, Berko, or
Singer, complete with built-in tamperproof thermostat and all necessary operating
and safety controls. Ceiling units shall be similar, but provide with remote wall
' mounted thermostats.
SECTION 15140 -SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
' 1.0 SUPPORT OF MECHANICAL E UIPMENT
Q
' 1.1 Provide the General Contractor with locations, dimensions, and weights of
equipment to be supported by the floor and roof structural systems. The final
' location of equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Contractor. Provide
accessories necessary to hang equipment from the structure at locations and in a
manner approved by the General Contractor.
' Page 14 of 33
PROTECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
' 1.2 Ductwork shall not be suspended from the steel roof deck within six feet of an
unframed opening. Within this area all hanging of ductwork shall be from the
' joists, beams, or supplementary steel provided by this Subcontractor.
1.3 Piping and mechanical equipment other than ductwork shall not be suspended
' form the steel roof deck at any location.
1.4 All pipes shall be supported so as to avoid any trapping or settlement. Hangers
' shall be so located as to properly support the piping, relieve strain on pipes and
fittings, and at the same time allow for ample expansion and contraction.
' A. The pipe hanging system shall be equivalent to the following:
' 1. Piping suspended form the construction above shall be hung from
Grinnell Company Figure #285 or #281 concrete inserts for
concrete construction, and an approved toggle bolt and hanger rod
' couplings for prefabricated, reinforced hollow concrete slabs.
2. An approved type clamp or bracket shall be used on other building
construction.
3. Piping shall be suspended from above inserts, clamps, or brackets
' by means of Figure #65 or #260 clevis hangers or #108 or #104
split pipe rings and steel pipe, or Figure #CT-269 pipe rings and
solid steel rods spaced not more than ten feet apart from 3/4" and
' larger pipe, and eight feet apart for'/2" pipe for copper pipe.
' 4. Universal "Auto-Grip" adjustable pipe hanger rings, galvanized for
galvanized, or black pipe or copper plated for copper pipe, may be
used in lieu of the above figure numbers..
' S. Inserts for all hanger rods and equipment attached to cast-in-place
concrete shall be set when concrete is placed. This Subcontractor
is solely responsible for placement of inserts to support his
' material and equipment.
' B. Risers shall be properly supported at various floors so as to distribute the
weight of the riser, and at the base to support the weight of the fluid.
' 2.0 CURBS AND FLASHINGS
2.1 Provide counter-flashing for all roof penetrations. Provide roof curb for all pipe,
' duct and conduit penetrations. Reinforce all holes through roof where required, to
the satisfaction of the General Contractor. Method of reinforcement shall be
Page 15 of 33
' PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
' shown on the Subcontractor's design drawings and meet manufacturers
recommendations and specifications.
2.2 Roof curbs and skids for mechanical equipment on the roof shall be furnished and
hoisted to the roof by the Subcontractor, who shall locate, install them, and
provide counter-flashing.
A. Factory curbs maybe supplied pending the approval of the installation and
' location by the General Contractor/Owner.
' SECTION 15190 -MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
1.0 LABELS
' 1.1 Provide permanent labels (laminated, painted or similar) to clearly identify
mechanical equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. Indicate tonage of each unit.
' SECTION 15250 -MECHANICAL INSULATION
' 1.0 GENERAL
1.1 .Insulation shall not be applied until the system is tested and approved. Where
used, vapor bamers shall be intact and continuous, with covering at joints and
fittings being vapor sealed. Insulation shall be continuous through all walls,
' floors and ceilings. Valve bodies shall be insulated to the same thickness as the
pipe. Apply all materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
' 1.2 Insulate all domestic hot and cold water piping, valves and fittings, above grade
and all domestic water piping below grade. Cold water piping within plumbing
walls need not be insulated.
' 1.3 Insulate roof drain sumps, horizontal storm piping above grade and the vertical
piping from the roof drain sump to the insulated horizontal run, including elbows.
2.0 PIPE INS ATI N
UL O
' 2.1 Pipe insulation shall be of the molded type construction. Jackets shall be suitable
for temperature involved and insulation thickness shall be in accordance with all
' applicable codes. Insulation on cold water piping shall have a vapor barrier
jacket.
' 2.2 Hazard ratings shall meet the requirements of the local Fire Marshall.
' Page 16 of 33
' PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
2.3 All underground piping shall be protected with 3/a" thick "Armaflex", "Rubatex",
or "Thermocell" where it passes through a floor slab.
' 2.4 Provide weatherproof, ultra-violet impervious jacket, properly sealed insulation
for all installations outside the building.
3.0 MATERIALS
~'~,' 3.1 Plumbing Piping System Insulation:
I'
I' A. Insulate all portable water systems, interior above ground storm water
piping and plumbing vents within six (6) lineal feet of roof outlet with 1"
thick fiberglass, 1'/2" thick -cellular glass or 1'/2" F thick calcium silicate
.insulation.
3.2 Dual Temperature Ductwork:
'
A. Insulate all hot/cold and return ductwork between fan discharge or HVAC
unit discharge and room terminal outlets (except omit insulation on return
' air ductwork located in return air ceiling plenums) with 2" thick rigid
fiberglass, 2" thick flexible fiberglass (application limited to concealed
locations) or 3" thick calcium silicate insulation.
'
3.3 Cold Equipment:
t A. Insulate all cold equipment including, but not limited to, roof drain bodies
with 3" thick fiberglass or 4%2" thick cellular glass insulation.
' 3.4 Hot Equipment:
' A. Insulate all hot equipment including, but not limited to, water heaters with
2" thick fiberglass or 3" thick calcium silicate.
4.0 Do not insulate fibrous glass ductwork or lined ductwork.
SECTION 15300 -AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER/FIRE PROTECTION
1.0 A complete Automatic Sprinkler/Fire Protection System shall be provided including, but
not limited to, the following:
1.1 All design, labor, materials, equipment, services, permits, skill, tool,
transportation, etc. to provide a complete and operating system.
1.2 All design, materials, and workmanship shall conform to the following:
' Page 1.7 of 33
'
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
All
li
bl
NFPA Standards
a. app
ca
e
.
b. Insurance Underwriter's Regulations of ISO.
c. All applicable codes, including the 1982 UBC.
d. All local ordinances.
e. Requirements of the State Fire Marshall.
f. Requirements of the Local Fire Marshall.
1.3 Drawings indicate proposed demising walls between tenants. Design for sprinkler
1 mains and distribution shall assume retail type occupancy.
' 1.4 Design drawings and engineering calculations submitted thirty (30) days from
award to the General Contractor, the insurance underwriter and the Local Fire
Marshall for approval. Submitted two (2) of the drawings and calculations to the
' General Contractor, bearing the stamp of approval by the insurance underwriter
and the Local Fire Marshall.
' 1.5 Provide connection to the flanged tee at the fire main brought inside the building
by others.
' 1.6 Hose racks, intermediate sprinkler, electric drive fire pump(s), detector checks,
meters, reservoirs, risers, etc., shall be provided as required by the local
authorities, and/or the insurance underwriter. Provide dual contact type flow
' switches for local alarm and future connection to Owner's security company
monitoring system, and as required by the Fire Marshall and applicable codes.
' 1.7 No electrical connections or painting shall be included.
1.8 Where sprinkler system is subject to freezing, provide complete antifreeze system,
or an approved dry system.
' 1.9 Submitting the Contractor's materials and test certificate to the insurance
underwriter and the General Contractor prior to receiving the final payment.
1.10 Main drain for draining and flow testing of the system. Pipe main drain to
appropriately sized drain line or an approved exterior location. Coordinate with
the plumbing Subcontractor.
1.11 Fire Department connection shall be located on an exterior building wall, subject
to the approval of the local officials.
' 2.0 MATERIALS
2.1 Chrome sprinkler heads, Grinnell or approved equal semi-recessed heads, shall be
furnished in all areas with finished ceilings. All other areas requiring sprinklers
' Page 18 of 33
~~~
' 3.0
L
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
shall be provided with brass pendant type sprinkler heads. Submit one (1) catalog
cut of proposed sprinkler head with bid.
2.2 Hose racks in finished areas shall be semi-recessed, steel with glass door, and
shall be equivalent to J. L. Industries Ambassador #6518F10.
2.3 All exposed equipment and materials shall be submitted to the General Contractor
for approval.
INSTALLATION
3.1 Coordinate design and installation with the work of all other trades. This includes
the coordination of sprinkler heads and piping locations in relation to HVAC
equipment, lighting, ceiling the system, structural members and chase spaces.
3.2 Upon completion, the entire piping system shall be tested and flushed as required
by the rules and regulations of the authority having jurisdiction and must be free
of leaks and all other defects.
' 3.3 All sprinkler heads in tenant areas shall be installed at the finished ceiling height
whether or not the ceiling is in place at the time of installation. All drops to be
fabricated on site.
3.4 Sprinkler piping shall be designed or installed at the maximum height above the
floor in all locations throughout the entire building and shall not block access to
removal of lights, mechanical units and other equipment. All piping shall be
within the structural joists.
i SECTION 15400 -PLUMBING
1.0
i~
PLUMBING
1.1 The plumbing work consists of, but is not limited to, the following:
A. All water piping, roof drainage system, sanitary waste and vent piping,
natural gas piping, and all plumbing fixtures and equipment required for a
complete installation.
1. Provide all rough-ins and connections required.
2. Connect to sanitary and storm sewer services brought to within
five (5) feet of the building.
Page 19 of 33
0
u
0
~hI''
L~
u
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
3. Connect to the building and fire water services brought to within
five (5) feet of the building.
4. Connect to natural gas service at a location directed by the local
utility company. This Subcontractor is responsible for all costs
related to bringing gas service into the building(s) from within 5'-
0" from outside building wall(s). Unless shown otherwise on site
drawings.
5. Provide clean-outs as required in floors, walls and at connection
outside the building.
6. Coordinate and verify all locations and conditions of areas
requiring work.
B. Domestic water heaters shall be electric.
C. Provide plugged or capped tees and wythe for future connections at
locations indicated.
D. Provide freezeproof wall hydrants spaced approximately 100' along the
back side of the building.
E. Provide freezeproof ground hydrants along the front side of the building at
approximately 200' on center, first and last one at 100' from end of
building. Locate piping drop to ground hydrant inside tenant demising
wall.
F. Provide one (1) main water meter to the project site and one (1) submeter
for each tenant space, one (1) remote meter at rear wall for each tenant
space.
G. Route all vertical runs of sanitary waste and vents, and water piping
through mechanical chases and floor openings at locations coordinated
with the Architect.
H. All penetrations and drains in concrete floor slabs shall be grouted to
support and properly close off void space(s) including openings provided
in floor slab by the Contractor for mechanical piping and systems. Use
approved fire-stopping material when grouting fire separations.
I. Provide natural gas piping to all gas fired equipment.
Page 20 of 33
' 2.0 PIPING SYSTEMS
1
ul
n
~~J
1
fl
0
u
2.1 Installation:
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
A. Domestic Water Piping: The entire domestic water piping system, fixtures
and equipment shall be disinfected in accordance with all applicable codes
and shall be thoroughly flushed to remove all traces of flux, chips, etc.
B. Install unions at connection to all equipment and dielectric unions or
couplings on joints between brass and copper and steel. Provide vacuum
breakers and shock absorbers as required.
C. Provide 2'/i" tee upstream- of meter for future lawn sprinkler system.
Extend 2'/2" copper piping from above the floor to 5' outside the building.
Provide 2%" pipe sleeve for lawn sprinkler control wiring or piping from
Mechanical Room to 5' outside the building.
D. Horizontal drainage piping for the storm and sanitary waste systems shall
run at a uniform pitch so as not to interfere with the structure.
E. Plumbing vents shall be offset as required so as to be no less than five (5)
feet from the face of the outside wall, and shall be located or extended to
such a height as to preclude odors from entering the fresh air intakes.
F. Provide condensate drains at all required locations. Condensate drains
shall be sized and installed at the direction of the Installing Contractor
and/or the unit manufacturer.
G. All piping systems shall be flushed or cleaned and shall be tested and
inspected in accordance with all applicable codes.
H. Provide electric heat tape and insulation around all piping running within
unheated spaces.
2.2 Materials:
A. Pipe Fittings:
1. All underground sanitary drainage piping inside the building shall
be scheduled 40 PVC Type D.W.V. or cast iron. Waste and vent
piping above grade shall be cast iron or scheduled 40 PVC Type
D.W.V. Vent stakes shall be provided with frostproof roof jackets.
Cast iron piping systems equivalent to "No-Hub" may be used
above grade where code permits. All storm drainage piping above
Page 21 of 33
u
~I
fl
I'~
n
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
grade shall be cast iron. All storm drainage piping below grade
shall be scheduled 40 PVC or service grade cast iron.
B.
C.
2. All water piping shall be Type L, hard copper above grade, with
wrought copper fittings and 95-5 solder joints, and Type K soft
copper below grade with minimum joints below floor. Piping shall
be sized for a maximum velocity of eight (8) feet/second.
Recommendations of the manufacture shall be followed for the
velocity restriction where abnormal water conditions could create
erosions and/or corrosion.
Clean-outs:
1. Floor clean-outs shall be cast iron body and frame with cast bronze
or brass clean-out plug, countersink head and adjustable round
nickel-bronze top in finished areas and cast iron top in unfinished
areas equivalent to Zurn 1400 Series.
2. Wall clean-outs shall be cast iron body adaptable to pipe with case
bronze or brass clean-out plug; stainless steel cover including
screws.
Floor Drains:
1. Floor drains in toilet rooms and other finished areas shall be
equivalent to Zurn ZN-415-B-P-VP. Provide backwater valves as
required. Coordinate installation of all drains with the General
Contractor to insure proper elevation and floor slope.
2. Provide floor drains in all Mechanical Rooms and/or as indicated
on the drawings or as required by equipment installation. ,
D. Roof Drains: Roof drains shall be equivalent to Zurn Z-100. Install under
.the direction of the Roofing Subcontractor. Flanges shall be 24" x 24" for
roof drains through 4" size, and 36" x 36" for drains larger than 4".
Flanges shall be turned over to the Roofing Subcontractor for installation.
Controlled flow roof drainage is not acceptable.
E. Condensate Drains: Pipes shall be Type L hard copper with wrought
copper fittings and 50 - 50 solder, or scheduled 40 galvanized steel pipe
with cast iron fittings.
F. Trap: Traps shall be provided on all fixture and inlets to the drainage
system, except where they are provided integral with the equipment or
fixtures. No fixture shall be double-trapped.
Page 22 of 33
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHA1vICAL CRITERIA
' G. Valves: Valves shall be installed on lines to all individual equipment
except those specified to be equipped with stop valves, and shall be of one
' make. Gate valves shall be for 125 PSI working pressure or higher and
shall be equivalent to Crane. Provide accessible gate valves on branch
piping to each set of toilet rooms, and other appropriate areas. Ball valves
' equivalent to Apollo maybe used as isolation valves.
H. Union shall be galvanized malleable iron, brass to iron seat ground joint.
'
I. Dielectric unions or coupling shall be equivalent to Epco.
' J. Wall hydrants shall be cast brass freezeless type with straight nozzle, 3/4"
hose connection, vacuum breaker, loose key handle and equivalent to
' Woodford.
K. Hose Bibbs: Hose bibbs shall be 3/4" with vacuum breaker and be
' equivalent to Woodford.
L. Water Hammer Arresters: Water hammer arresters shall be provided with
stainless steel housing for each battery of flush valves operated fixtures
and equivalent to Smith. Size by the fixture unit method. Install above
the lay-in ceiling in an accessible location, or provide a wall access panel.
M. Electric Heat Tape: Electric heat tape shall be coordinated by the
Plumbing Contractor and installed by the Electrical Contractor if required.
3.0 WATER HEATER S
()
' A. Water heater tanks shall be glass lined, with a minimum of 3" of fiberglass
insulation, factory installed magnesium anodes, immersion type heating elements,
' high limit control and all other necessary operating and safety controls,
equivalent to Lochinvar, A.O. Smith, State Industries, Rheem, or Ruud. They
shall be guaranteed for three (3) years against tank failure and bear the UL label.
' Provide ASME rated T & P relief valve with discharge pipe to the floor, janitor's
receptor, or service sink.
' B. Heater shall be sized to supply water to fixtures at 110 degrees F. Water meters
shall be sized based on fixture and equipment served and the appropriate design
criteria. Water heaters mounted overhead shall be set on a galvanized steel pan
1 with soldered watertight seams and provided with a 1" drain line discharging to
the floor, janitor's receptor, or service sink.
Page 23 of 33
1
' PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
' 4.0 CIRCULATING PUMPS
' 4.1 Provide hot water circulation pump(s) if the distance from the water heater to the
fixture exceeds 35 feet. Pumps shall be all bronze circulator, 1750 RPM, with
thermal overload protection and equivalent to Grundfos, Bell and Gossett, Taco,
' Thrust or Armstrong. Provide motor starting switch with pilot light. Provide all
wiring from the motor starting switches to the pumps.
0
u
!~
SECTION 15440 -PLUMBING FIXTURES
1.0 PLUMBING FIXTURES
1.1 Plumbing fixtures shall be equivalent ~to American Standard or Kohler. The
equivalent of types listed with chrome plated exposed traps, escutcheons, faucets,
stop valves and supplies. Provide fixtures for the handicapped as indicated and
required.
1.2 All bracing or reinforcing angles required to support plumbing fixtures shall be
furnished and installed by the Subcontractor.
1.3 Plumbing fixtures furnished shall be equivalent to the following:
A. Common Space:
1. WC-1 -Water Closet: Kohler Model #K4250-ET "Wellcomme".
White vitreous china siphon jet elongated toilet with 21/4"
passageway and 1'/2" top stud. Furnish complete with #K-4670-C
plastic seat with check hinge and Zurn #Z-6000-WS flush valve.
2. WC-2 -Water Closet -Handicap: Kohler Model #K4268-ET
"Highcliff'. White vitreous china siphon jet elongated toilet with
21/4" passageway and 1'/Z" top stud. Furnish complete with #K-
4670-C plastic seat with check hinge and Zurn #Z-6000-WS flush
valve.
3. UR-1 -Urinal: Kohler Model #K-4985-T "Freshman". White
vitreous china space saving siphon jet with 3/4" top stud. Furnish
complete with Carver and Zurn #Z-6003 flush valve.
4. UR-2 -Urinal -Handicap: Same as UR-1 except mount at
handicapped height.
5. L-1 -Lavatory (oval Countertop): Kohler Model #K-2195
"Pennington". White vitreous china self rimming oval lavatory
Page 24 of 33
' PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
r with 4" faucet centers. Furnish complete with #K-9000 cast brass
"P"-trap, #K-7606 3/8" angle supplies with stops and Delta #520
' H.D.F. single lever facet.
6. SS-1 -Floor Sink: Flat Model #TSBC-6010 furnish complete with
' #830-AA faucet and vacuum breaker; #832-AA hose; #889-CC
mop hanger and #1453-BB strainer.
7. EWC-1 - Electric Water Cooler (Handicap): Oasis Model
#OPLEF8WMD 7.8 G.P.H. of 50 degrees F. Drinking water
(115/1/60 - 1/5 HP). Furnish complete with cast brass "P" trap,
' supply stop and stainless steel panel.
8. S-1 -Two Compartment Sink: Eklay #LR3319. 18 gauge Type
1 302 stainless steel sink. Furnish complete with #LK-35 basket
strainer, cast brass "P" -trap and supply stops, Delta #120HDF
faucet, In-Sink-Erator "Classic" garbage disposal and In-Sink-
' Erator Model #H-778 hot water dispenser.
' 9. S-2 -Single Compartment Sink: Elkay #DLR-2522-10. 18 gauge
style 302 with #LK-35 basket strainer, cast brass "P" -trap and
supply stops, Delta #120HDF faucet, In-Sink-Erator "Classic"
' garbage disposal and In-Sink-Erator Model #11-778 hot water
dispenser.
I,
B. Tenant Areas:
1. WC-1 -Water Closes (Handicap): Kohler Model #K-3420EB
"Wellworth Lite". White vitreous china, close coupled, elongated
toilet, direct flow priming heat. Furnish complete with Church
#9550NSSC plastic seat with check hinge, and #K-7638 3/8" angle
supply with tube and stop.
2. WC-2: Same as WC-1 except use #K-4670-C plastic seat.
3. L-2 -Lavatory: Kohler Model #K-2032 "Greenwich". White
vitreous china, wall hung with 4" faucet centers. Furnish complete
with #K-1803 wall bracket, #K-9000 cast brass "P" -trap, #K-7606
3/8" angle supplies with stops and Delta #520 H.D.F. single lever
faucet.
4. L-1 -Lavatory (Handicap): Same as L-1 except mounted at
handicap height.
Page 25 of 33
' PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
SECTION 15488 -NATURAL GAS SYSTEM
' 1.0 GAS PIPING
1.1 Pipe shall be scheduled 40 black steel with 150 PSI black wrought iron screwed
' fittings through 2" for exposed piping and standard weight welded fittings from
2'/i" and larger and for all concealed piping. Piping above roof shall either be
galvanized, or painted with prime coat and one finished coat, and shall be
supported on redwood blocks and guided by loose fitting galvanized steel pipe
straps.
' 2.0 VALVES
2.1 Gas shut-off valves shall be equal to Powell heavy pattern brass, ground key type
through 1' size and Mueller "Lubemseal", Nordstrom or A.C.F. lubricated plugs
locks on 11/4" or larger.
' SECTION 15620 -FUEL FIRED HEATING UNITS
' 1.0 NATURAL GAS FIRED UNIT HEATERS
1.1 Gas fired unit heaters shall have adjustable horizontal louvers, fan guard, gas
pressure regulator, safety pilot, shut-off valves electric gas valves, high limit,
transformer, corrosion resistant burner with electronic spark ignition and draft
diverter. Units shall be sized for proper through and air change rate as well as for
heat output. Provide power venters for units in rooms having negative pressures
in relation to outside.
' 1.2 Blower type unit heaters and ductwork may be provided in lieu of propeller type
units as an option, or as required for proper air distribution.
' 1.3 Provide thermostats with fan "on-auto" switch and tamperproof guard. Provide ~l"
air space behind thermostats mounted on exterior walls.
1.4 Units shall be Reznor, Trane, Modine, Bryant, Carrier or Hastings.
SECTION 15782 -ROOFTOP HEATING AND COO IN TNTTS
' 1.0 HVAC UNITS
1.1 Units shall be Carrier, Lennox, Trane, or equal, packaged heating/cooling single
' zone rooftops with DX coil in conjunction with an air cooled condensing unit,
maximum 10 nominal ton capacity.
Page 26 of 33
n
i
n
L
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
1.2 Units shall come complete, factory assembled so only duct and electrical
connections are required at the site.
1.3 Units shall have hermetic or semi-hermetic compressor with a minimum five (5)
year warranty.
1.4 Units shall include internal overload protection, service valves, site glass, filter-
drier, low ambient lockout when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F.,
economizer (landlord areas only), starter, contractors, relays, etc. and all operating
and safety controls.
1.5 Units shall be natural gas fired, electric spark ignition and power forced
combustion blower. Unit shall come equipped with pilot valve, combination main
gas valve and pressure regulator, high limit state, and automatic relight.
1.6 Units having mixed air temperatures of 40 degrees F. and less at winter design
conditions shall have corrosion resistant heat exchanger.
1.7 Rooftop equipment shall be completely weatherproof.
1.8 Unit blowers section shall include adjustable speed direct drive or V-belt drive
centrifugal blower mounted on vibration isolators. Blower shall be forward
curved DWDI.
1.9 Condenser fan shall be propeller types, non-reversing with direct drive motors.
1.10 Two sets of filters, throw-away filters (first set to be used during construction,
with second set of filters to be installed at the time of occupancy.
2.0 CONTROLS
2.1 Tenant Areas:
A. Provide for each unit a manual change-over, heating/cooling thermostat
with limit stops or with a key set point operator and integral or separate
"heat-cool-off' switch.
2.2 Landlord and Common Area:
A. Provide for each unit an automatic change-over heating/cooling, night set
back thermostat with limit stops or with a key set point operator.
2.3 Thermostats are to be mounted directly over and aligned with the room lighting
switches whenever possible.
Page 27 of 33
i
C
~~
_.
n
u
u
u
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
2.4 Provide an "occupied-unoccupied" switch and control wiring to provide
continuous fan operation during unoccupied hours. On occupied cycle, fans shall
operate continuously when set on "heat" or "cool". On "unoccupied" cycle, fans
shall operate in response to heat controller when set on "heat". Minimum outside
air shall provide necessary ventilation requirements, exhaust system make-up and
positive space static pressure in relation to the outside.
SECTION 15870 -POWER VENTILATORS
1.0 CEILING MOUNTED EXHAUST UNITS
1.1 Ceiling mounted exhaust units shall be equal to Acme, Carnes, Greenheck, or
Penn complete with centrifugal wheel,' gravity backdraft damper and separate
grille. Propeller fan units will not be acceptable. Securely mount blower unit in
such a manner as to minimize vibration and noise. Some levels of the system
shall not exceed three (3) Bones within five (5) feet of the exhaust grille or unit.
Other methods of installation meets the sound requirements. Provide roof
flashings, caps, etc., as required for the units exhausting to the outside.
2.0 ROOF MOUNTED UNITS
2.1 Roof mounted units shall be equal to Greenheck, Penn, Acme, Cook, Carnes, or
Jenn Aire centrifugal units with weatherproof housing, backward curved
aluminum wheel, rubber vibration isolators, bird screen, starter, factory wired
disconnect switch, heavy duty aluminum gravity backdraft damper, either
adjustable pitch V-belt drive or direct drive as required and AMCA certified
ratings. Provide 12" curb. Provide motorized dampers on units exhausting more
than 3000 cfm.
3.0 SOUND LEVELS
3.1 Sound levels of all units shall be compatible with the type occupancy in
accordance with ASHRAE recommendations.
4.0 INSTALLATION
4.1 Units shall be secured to roof curbs by means of cadium plated screws or lag
screws, and shall be located as distant from the building perimeter as practical,
and minimum code required clearances shall be maintained from all outdoor air
intakes.
Page 28 of 33
' PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
' SECTION 15890 - METAL AND NON-METAL DUCTWORK AND
ACCESSORIES
' 1.0 DUCTWORK
' 1.1 Sheet metal work and fiberglass ductwork shall be in accordance with the latest
edition of the SMACNA Standards and ASHRAE recommendations. Sheet metal
' shall be number 1 grade galvanized steel. Duct systems shall be designed and
installed so that the total static pressure of each system, including the additional
pressure drop through a dirty filter in service three (3) months, will not exceed the
cataloged static pressure relate to the normal CFM rating of the unit. Provide
' turning vanes, elbows half sweep or less, and mitered elbows, including fiberglass
ductwork if required to meet this criteria:
1.2 Provide volume dampers as required for proper balancing. Registers and diffusers
are not to be used for primary balancing. Dampers shall be one gauge heavier
' than the duct gauge and shall be reinforced to prevent vibration.
1.3 Round ductwork shall be equivalent to spiral lockseam pipe and fittings
' conforming to ASTM A 0527-71.
' 1.4 Provide plastic coated water-tight drip pan at the base of each exhaust, relief and
fresh air riser
.
1.5 All ductwork in finished spaces shall be above the ceiling unless noted otherwise.
Ductwork shall be a minimum of 7" above the "T" bar so as not to interfere with
the lighting fixtures.
'
1.6 Access panels for equipment needing periodic adjustment or checking such as
filter banks, motorized dampers, etc. shall be gasketed and provided with locking
' latches. Machine screws are not acceptable in such locations to secure panels. ,
l .7 The use of round metal duct or fiberglass to be at Owners discretion.
'
2.0 ACO USTIC LINING
2.1 All exhaust ductwork within ten (10) feet of the fan, and all return air and transfer
ductwork shall be internally lined with 1" thick 3 lb. density liner meeting NFPA
90A. All ductwork above the roof shall be similarly lined with 2" thick insulation
and ductwork shall be weatherproof.
Page 29 of 33
C
n
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
3.0 PREFABRICATED FIBERGLASS DUCT
3.1 Prefabricated fiberglass duct shall be equivalent to Owens-Corning fiberglass
Type #475-FR, or Knauf #EL-475, with taped joints and seams. Using tape
recommended by the manufacturer may be used where concealed. Joint overlaps
shall be stapled with the seam. Jackets shall be cleaned of all films, dirt, or other
foreign matter prior to taping. Flexible fiberglass duct equivalent to Thermoflex
#MKE, rated to 2" working pressure may be used at individual diffusers, but shall
be properly supported by the use of 2" sheet metal straps or wire through eyelets
provided on the duct for that purpose. Fiberglass and flexible ductwork will not
be allowed in exposed areas. All flex duct is to be independently supported and
not to be laid on the ceiling. Fiberglass duct shall be mechanically attached to the
ventilating units and connections shall be taped.
3.2 All jackets must meet all applicable fire codes for the installation within the return
air plenum. Any additional fire alarm system detectors or controls required due to
the use of fiberglass duct in a return air plenum shall be provided by this
Subcontractor at his sole expense.
4.0
0
u
i,~
i
n
0
SOUND ATTENUATION
4.1 Provide between metal ductwork, and inlet and outlet of ventilating units, as
required to isolate sound and vibration from the ductwork and housing, flexible
duct connectors equal to Duro-Dyne "Durolon" flameproof coated, heavy duty
glass fabric meeting NFPA 90A requirements.
5.0 FIRE DAMPERS
5.1 UL labeled fire dampers shall be provided at all penetrations of fire separations in
accordance with all applicable codes and the NFPA recommendations. Fire
dampers shall be the curtain type with unobstructed opening of the same
dimension as the full sized duct, with the blade storage section outside the air
stream. Provide access panels permanently labeled "Fire Damper Access" for the
purpose of inspecting and resetting each fire damper. Panels in the ductwork shall
be gasketed and securely latched, and shall be insulated where required. Panels
shall also be provided where required by the General Construction and supplied to
the General Contractor for coordination and installation.
SECTION 15932 -AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS
1.0 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
1.1 Units shall be standard manufactured products, finished in factory applied white
or off-white finish for finished ceiling mounted diffusers and registers, and factory
' Page 30 of 33
L
L
1
7
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
applied prime coat in other areas unless noted otherwise. They shall be of a style
and size to provide even air distribution when spaced a maximum often (10) feet
on center, provided with balancing dampers, and shall have a noise level
compatible with the type of occupancy.
1.2 Grilles, registers, and diffusers shall be equivalent to the following:
A. Carnes #SKTA for interior ceiling space supply registers or diffusers.
Diffusers shall be specifically designed for lay-in ceiling application. Do
not provide volume dampers at ceiling diffusers.
B. Carnes "Eggcrate" '/Z" aluminum or plastic for return air, exhaust air and
air transfer grilles.
1.3 Stamped grille and registers are not acceptable. All units and systems shall be
capable of operating without exceeding NC35, unless noted otherwise. All units
shall fit neatly into the ceiling grid system, where applicable, with no overlapping
grids.
1.4 Locate return air grilles to minimize sound transfer. Ceiling mounted perimeter
supply registers shall be selected for a maximum air velocity on cooling of 50
FPM at 2' - 6' above the heating to prevent condensation. Ducted ceiling transfer
' grilles shall be utilized for make-up air in toilet rooms, etc. Door transfer grilles
shall not be used.
u
C
I~~
1.5 This Subcontractor shall install return air grilles prior to the installation of the
ceiling tiles, or he shall be responsible for cutting the the and providing the trim
tree.
2.0 OUTDOOR AIR INTAKE
2.1 Units shall be equal to Greenheck, Penn or Acme, of aluminum construction and
complete with bird screen. Unit shall be secured to the roof curb by means of
cadium plated screw or lag screws. Provide 12" curb.
3.0 LOUVERS
3.1 Weather louvers shall be equivalent to American-Warming LF-31, galvanized
steel with factory applied prime coat and'/2" mesh aluminum bird screen. Louver
shall be weather-tight, with both interior and exterior adjacent surfaces being
caulked. Minimum acceptable louver free area shall be 45%. Intake dampers
shall be manufacturer's designed low leakage dampers.
Page 31 of 33
0
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
MECHANICAL CRITERIA
SECTION 15990 -TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
1.0 TESTING AND BALANCING
1.1 Test and balance all duct systems to provide reasonably even temperature and air
' distribution. Data on the actual performance of individual fans, including amp
readings, air velocities, and volumes at each diffuser, supply register, exhaust
register, etc., as necessary for a properly balanced system, shall be submitted to
the Owner for approval, and shall be included in the operation and maintenance
manuals. Necessary changes to the dampers, fan speeds, pulleys, or belts to
' obtain proper air movement shall be done by the Subcontractor. at his expense.
All drives shall be checked for alignment and tension, and all bearings shall be
checked for proper lubrication. The Subcontractor shall return to the building for
' one (1) additional time to rebalance the system completely at a time agreed upon
by the Owner.
2.0 TEST AND BALANCE REPORTS
2.1 Submit air and water test and balance reports, complete with motor and voltage
readings, as specified elsewhere. Certify the accuracy of these reports and include
in the operations and maintenance manuals.
END OF DIVISION 15000
0
r
Page 32 of 33
' PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
DIVISION 16000 -ELECTRICAL
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The rovisions of the A Bement between Owner and Design/Builder of this
p ~'
specification shall apply to all work of this Section.
B. The work of all Sections 16000 through 16900 shall be performed under one
subcontract agreement.
C. The general provisions in Division 1 shall apply to this Section.
1.02. SCOPE
' A. Provide all design, certified drawings, permits, labor, equipment, materials and
services as required for a complete operating electrical system in accordance with
the contract documents.
' B. These Specifications indicate the Owner's minimum requirements; the Contractor
shall be responsible for modifications required to comply with all applicable
codes.
' 1.03 DESIGN, DRAWINGS AND EQUIPMENT DATA
A. Design:
' 1. Within thirty (30) days after award, furnish complete electrical design
drawings including, but not limited to, the detailed layout of equipment,
' raceways, panels, wiring, fixtures and devices. These drawings shill
indicate the voltage, phase, horsepower, kilowatt .rating, etc., of all
equipment, electrical service to all equipment (including that furnished by
others), complete circuit-by-circuit schedule of all power and lighting
panels, light fixture schedule, equipment connection schedule(s), and
telephone terminal and riser locations. This shall include '/a" scale
drawings of all electrical equipment rooms (or spaces), and service and
distribution equipment as well as 1/8" scale building floor plans.
2. The design drawings are required to be updated throughout the project to
include floor plan revisions mainly for tenant layout. AutoCad files will
' be provided by the Architect for base drawings and revisions.
' Page 1 of 26
~i
~'~
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
3. Consult the complete drawings and specifications and other Trade
Contractors to determine and provide for. the electrical requirements of
work provided by others including, but not limited to, the Plumbing,
Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning, and Automatic Sprinkler
System Contractors. Where connections are made to equipment furnished
by others, obtain exact locations of connections and electrical
requirements from the parties furnishing the equipment.
4. If clarifications to the specifications are required to document interface
with these Contractors, provide such clarification prior to entering into a
contract.
5. Any deviations to this Specification shall be submitted to the Owner for
approval.
6. Later claims for labor, materials, equipment and work required for any
difficulty encountered shall be recognized, and all such difficulties shall be
resolved by this Contractor at his sole expense.
B. Submittals:
1. Review and approve all submittals prior to submitting them to the General
Contractor/Owner.
2. Provide the following submittals for approval within thirty (30) calendar
days after contract award:
a. Power riser diagrams.
b. Proposed locations and layouts of electrical distribution equipment.
c. A list of proposed Subcontractors and material manufacturers.
n
0
iJ
d. Brochures and data on all proposed equipment, fixtures, etc.
e. Schedule of electrical work for the project including delivery dates
of equipment and fixtures.
3. Provide the following submittals for approval within thirty (30) calendar
days after contract award:
a. One reproducible set of 100% complete electrical design drawings.
Page 2 of 26
0
i_
n
C.
D
4
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
b. Six (6) sets of shop drawings of all equipment including (but not
limited to) distribution equipment, panel boards, light fixtures,
disconnect switches, circuit breakers, special systems, etc.
c. Calculations of final service size and power distribution including
(but not limited to) a detailed load breakdown indicating total
connected loads and demand factors and a short circuit analysis of
the distribution system.
Shop drawings submitted for approval by the general Contractor/Owner
shall include the following:
a. The Electrical Contractor'•s stamp of approval.
b. Detailed custom information.
c. All features and options clearly indicated.
d. Wiring diagrams (custom) for all systems.
5. Obtain approval of submittals before beginning work. No payments will
be made until all design drawings, calculations, and required submittals
are approved by the General Contractor/Owner. Any work started before
receiving approval on any of this data will be at this Contractor's risk and
expense.
6. Any changes shall be submitted to the General Contractor/Owner for
approval prior to performing the work. Any deviations from approved
submittal data without the approval of the General Contractor/Owner shall
be at this Contractor's risk and expense.
As-Built Drawings:
1. As the work progresses, record all changes from the installation originally
indicated on the design drawings. Upon completion of the project and
prior to receipt of final payment, add these revisions to the original
drawings. If no revisions were made in the work, note "No Revisions" on
the drawings. In either case, the drawings should be labeled as "As-Built",
approved by the Subcontractor originally certifying the drawings and
submitted to the General Contractor/Owner.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. At the completion of the work, furnish three complete manuals describing
the construction, guarantees, operation and maintenance of the electrical
system installed under this contract. Provide a list of names and addresses
of the nearest supply houses carrying spare parts for all equipment
furnished. Provide a written description of system operation and
Page 3 of 26
J
~_ ,~'
u
fl
n
L _'
Ill
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
procedures. This material shall be submitted to the General
Contractor/Owner. Include a submittal of all fixtures, panels, etc., in the
manual.
1.04 CODES AND PERMITS
A. Design and install all electrical work in accordance with the latest regulations of
the National Electrical Code and all other applicable codes, laws, regulations and
local code enforcement officials. Requirements of the applicable codes and
regulations shall be considered as minimum safety requirements, and criteria in
this specification which exceeds code requirements shall take precedence.
B. Provide all emergency power/lighting systems, exit lights and other electrical
work required by governing codes.
C. Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses, fees, etc., required by governing agencies
prior to commencement of work. Upon completion of work, obtain all necessary
inspections, approvals, and written acceptance from the proper governing agencies
having jurisdiction.
D. Submit electrical drawings and specifications to the building officials with permit
applications.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the electrical design and installation with the work of all other trades.
See mechanical criteria scope of work.
B. In case of conflict, the General Contractor/Owner shall decide the proper
location/layout and any costs of revisions shall be at the expense of the
Subcontractor responsible for the work. ,
1.06 TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER SERVICES
A. The Subcontractor shall provide a temporary electrical distribution system
throughout the building to insure adequate and proper power, and lighting for all
trades.
1. Provide 20 amp, 120 volt power to within 100'-0" of every point within
the building.
2. Provide a temporary lighting system with adequate lighting levels as
necessary to complete the work throughout the building.
Page 4 of 26
u
1
r
J
J
u
fl
0
L
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
3. Provide periodic maintenance of the temporary power and lighting system,
replacing lamps and repairing equipment as damage occurs.
4. All temporary lighting and power shall be in accordance with OSHA
standards.
5. Provide supplemental temporary power as required by the General
Contractor/Owner.
B. All first time charges by the power company for installation and removal of the
temporary system shall be included in this contract.
C. All charges by the power company for energy consumption during the
construction phase shall be borne by the General Contractor.
D. Service shall be sized as required to provide adequate power to the equipment
required by all trades for the construction phase.
E. Specialty electric wiring and consumption costs for other equipment, such as
welders, pumps and hoisting equipment shall be borne by the
Contractor/Subcontractor requiring it.
1.07 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee all materials and equipment installed under this subcontract against
defects in workmanship and materials for a period of 12 months after final
acceptance of the work by the Owner. Repair and/or replace any materials or
equipment developing such defects within that time promptly upon due notice
given by the Owner, at no additional expense to the Owner.
B. All equipment bearing a manufacturer's guarantee shall be construed as an
extended guarantee to the Owner by the manufacturer. Any such equipment that
proves to be defective in materials or workmanship within the guarantee period is
to be replaced by the Subcontractor in accordance with the manufacturer's
guarantee, at no additional expense to the Owner.
1.08. CONDITIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. The Contractor shall provide a complete detailed cost breakdown, quantity, labor
and material, in the manner and from required by the General Contractor/Owner
for accounting and monthly progress payment purposes. The successful bidder
shall submit the required cost breakdown prior to award of the contract.
B. Final payment will not be made until after the final inspection and acceptance of
the work by the Owner.
Page 5 of 26
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
C. The Contractor shall be responsible to the General Contractor/Owner for the
design and installation of the electrical work to satisfy the contractual
responsibilities of the General Contractor/Owner. No payment will be made to
the Contractor for extra work unless said extra work is authorized, prior to any
additional cost incurred.
1.09 UNIT PRICES
A. Provide unit prices for the cost to furnish and install, or to delete the items of
electrical work as described below. Prices shall remain in effect for one (1)
calendar year from the contract date.
1. Furnish and install one of each type of light fixture listed in the lighting
fixture schedule.
2. Furnish and install one general use wall duplex receptacle complete
(nomina1200 watts).
3. Furnish and install one special use wall isolated ground duplex receptacle
complete (nominal 1500 watts).
4. Furnish and install one (two compartment) power pole with two duplex
receptacles.
5. Furnish and install one exit light.
6. Furnish and install one emergency light.
7. Furnish and install a 400 amp service in lieu of a 200 amp service.
8. Furnish and install 100 foot-candles of lighting in sales area in lieu of 70
foot-candles (per square foot).
9. Furnish and install underground conduit (including trenching and backfill)
per lineal foot for the following sizes:
a. 3/a" conduit
b. 1'/4" conduit
c. 2" conduit
d. 3" conduit
e. 4" conduit
10. Furnish and install (2) circuits for "rear" tenant signage. J Box to run to
back wall. Mount J Box on outside of back wall.
Page 6 of 26
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
SECTION 16030 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS OF MECHANICAL
EQUIPMENT
1.0 Verify line voltage for specific project site (3 phase, 4 wire). All mechanical equipment
shall be suitable for use with the line voltage electrical service, except that motors 1/3 HP
and less may be 120 volt, single phase. Where mechanical equipment is not available in
the specified voltage, the Subcontractor shall provide a transformer with adequate
capacity for the unit being served.
2.0 All motors shall be high efficiency models selected for the specific applications so as to
never operate within the service factor range.
3.0 The Subcontractor shall provide all starters complete with the overload and low voltage
protection, when started with and located at the equipment and all remote push-buttons,
control devices, relays, auxiliary contacts, etc., required for his equipment to utilize the
.line voltage service specified. All starters shall include hand-off-auto switches.
4.0 Responsibility: Unless otherwise indicated all motors and controls for Division 15
equipment shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following
schedule:
Set In Power Control
Furnished Place ~ Wiring Wiring
Under Under Under Under
ITEM ivisi n Division ivisi n Division
Equipment Motors 15 15 16
Starters/Contractors:
Separate 15 16 16 15
Factory Mounted
and Wired 15 15 16 15
Push-button Stations:
Separates 15 16 15
In Starter Enclosure 15 16 15
Disconnect Switches 16 16 16
Thermal Overload Switches 16 16 16
Manual Operating Switches 16 16 16
Control Relays 15 15 15
Page 7 of 26
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
Control Transformers 15 16 16 15
Line Voltage Thermostat 15 15 15
Low Voltage Thermostat 15 15 15
Sub-Base Low Voltage 15 15 15
Time Switches Not In
Control Panel 15 15 16 15
Thermostat and Controls Integral
with Equipment of Directly
Attached to Ducts, Pipes, etc. 15 15 15
Equipment in Temperature
Control Panels 15 15 15
Valve Motors, Damper Motors,
Solenoid Valves, etc. 15 15 15
Control Circuit Outlets 16 16 ~ 16
Smoke Detectors Including
Relays for Fan Control 16 15 16 16
Equipment Interlocks 15 15 15
5.0 Control Wiring:
A. Consists of wiring in pilot circuits of contractors, starters, relays, etc., and wiring
for valve and damper operators.
B. For single phase devices where power current passes through controller, wiring
between controller and device shall be considered control wiring; wiring to device
from electrical panel shall be considered power wiring.
6.0 Wiring shall be adequately supported above the ceilings and shall not be supported by the
ceiling grid system, ceiling tile, lighting fixtures, mechanical equipment, piping or
ductwork hangers.
7.0 The Electrical Subcontractor will provide separate disconnect switches for each piece of
equipment (except where specified to be provided with the equipment), and line voltage
power wiring to the disconnect switch, the starter and the unit. Units having integral
disconnect switches will have line voltage power wiring by the Electrical Subcontractor.
Page 8 of 26
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
' 8.0 The Electrical Subcontractor under the supervision of the Mechanical Subcontractor shall
be responsible to see that the rotation of all three phase motors for mechanical equipment
' is in the correct direction prior to equipment operation.
9.0 The Subcontractor shall have the responsibility to provide the adequate rough-in
information to the Electrical Subcontractor. Any costs, such as patching and refinishing
walls, resulting from inadequate information shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical
Subcontractor.
' 10.0 Refer to the Electrical S ecifications for the availability of temporary electrical power.
P
' 11.0 Electric Heating Units:
A. Electric baseboard heaters shall be commercial grade equivalent to Market, Berko,
or Singer, complete with built-in tamperproof thermostat and all necessary
operating and safety controls.
' B. Electric cabinet heaters shall be commercial grade equivalent to Market, Berko, or
Singer, complete with built-in tamperproof thermostat and all necessary operating
and safety controls. Ceiling units shall be similar, but provide with remote wall
mounted thermostats.
' 12.0 Furnish and install (2) circuits for "rear" tenant signage. J Box to run to back wall.
Mount J Box on outside of back wall.
' SECTION 16110 -RACEWAYS
' 1.00 GENERAL
1.01 CONDUIT
A. All exposed exterior conduit shall be full weight rigid steel or IMC galvanized or
sheridized inside and out.
B. Interior conduit maybe electrical metallic tubing.
C. Underground conduit shall be Carton Schedule 40 PVC. All joints and
terminations shall be made according to manufacturer's recommendations using
"Carton Solvent Weld Cement" to insure that all joints are watertight.
D. Flexible galvanized steel conduit shall be used for "make-up" connections to
' rotating machinery (maximum 24"), equipment or flush lighting fixtures. Flexible
conduit in damp or wet locations shall be liquid tight.
Page 9 of 26
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
' E. Type BX cable shall be considered an acceptable cabling system for use within
accessible ceiling spaces and wall cavities for branch circuit wiring where
' permitted by all applicable codes.
F. Prefabricated wiring systems are preferred and are to be utilized where permitted
by code. Approved prefabricated wiring systems are Lithonia "Reloc", Day-Brite
"Electro-Connect" and Metalux "MWS". Note on proposal form if prefabricated
wiring is to be utilized.
' G. Conduit shall be sized in accordance with the latest edition of the National
Electrical Code; however, a minimum of %2" for flexible conduit must be
' maintained. All other conduits shall be'/2" minimum, unless otherwise noted.
SECTION 16120 -CONDUCTORS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 MATERIAL
' A. .Minimum size wire for lighting and power feeders and branch circuits (20
ampere) shall be No. 12 AWG copper. Minimum size wire for control. circuits
shall be No. 14 AWG copper. All wire shall be stranded.
' B. All conductors for feeders No. 6 AWG and larger shall be Type THHW,
THWN/THHN or XHHW copper, 600 volt, unless otherwise noted on the
' drawings. Conductors shall be insulated with virgin cross-linked polyethylene
insulation. All conductors smaller than No. 6 AWG shall be Type THHN-
THWN copper (per N.E.C.) 600 volts unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
' The conductors shall be insulated with virgin PVC compound and shall have an
overall extruded nylon jacket. Nylon "skim" or "dip" coating will not be
' acceptable. ,
C. A green ground wire, size according to the NEC Table 250-95, shall be installed
' in all flexible conduit and kept isolated from the white neutral wire.
SECTION 16143 -WIRING DEVICES
1.00 ENERAL
1.01 SWITCHES
' A. Wall switches shall be specification grade, flush toggle switches with ivory
handles, unless other colors are noted on drawings.
C~'~~
Page 10 of 26
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
B. All switches shall be of the same type throughout the building and shall be the
product of one manufacturer. The catalog numbers for 20 ampere single pole
switches are as follows:
Arrow-Hart 1991-I Hubbell 1221-I
Bryant 4901-I Sylvania 1221A-I
General Electric 5951-I Slater 720-AG-I
C. Approved equal manufacturers shall be acceptable.
D. Three-way, four-way, double-pole, etc. shall be of the same series.
E. Provide key-operated switches in public areas.
F. Weatherproof switches shall be gray Hubbell 1781 on an FS box.
1.02 RECEPTACLES
A. Duplex receptacles shall be specification grade 15-ampere ivory, side and back
wired and have a body of heavy phenolic, unless other colors are noted on
drawings.
B. All receptacles shall be of the same type throughout the building and shall be the
product of one manufacturer.
C. The catalog numbers for 15 ampere receptacles are as follows:
Arrow-Hart 5252S-I Hubbell 5252-I
Bryant 5252-I Sylvania 5252-I
General Electric GEN5262-I Slater 5252-AG-I
D. Approved equal manufacturers shall be acceptable.
E. GFCI receptacles shall be feed-thru 15 amp Bryant GFR53FT, Hubbell GF-5362,
or Square D GFDR-120BC-I.
F. Isolated ground outlets shall be Hubbell IG-5262-I or approved equal.
1.03 PLATES
A. Plates for flush devices shall be smooth ivory thermoplastic, Hubbell P1 Series.
Plates for devices in surface outlets shall be galvanized steel wiring device covers.
Gang plates shall be installed on gang installation devices. Blank covers for pull
and junction boxes shall be galvanized, or aluminum in finished areas.
Page 11 of 26
~I
n
L
J
i~
l
0
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
B. Where duplex receptacles are protected by a GFCI receptacles or circuit breaker,
plates shall be ivory plastic Bryant 88101-GF-I, engraved "G.F.C.I.
PROTECTED".
C. Weatherproof coverplates -Bryant 5210B or GFRWPH; or Hubbell CWP8H or
CWP26H, on horizontally mounted boxes.
1.04 DUPLEX RECEPTACLE LOCATION
A. Duplex receptacles shall be as described as falling into two categories. These
shall be special use (rated at 1500 watts connected load) and general use (rated at
200 watts connected).
B. In addition to code required receptacles, duplex receptacles shall be provided as
follows:
1. Exterior general use GFI weatherproof receptacles shall be provided at
nominal 150'-0" intervals at the rear side of the building, and connected to
the "house" service.
2. Exterior general use GFI weatherproof receptacles shall be provided at
nominal 100'-0" intervals on the front side of the building (mount 10'-0"
A.F.F. to the rear side of the canopy columns), and connected to the
"house" service (wire four per circuit).
3. A special use duplex receptacle shall be installed at each 120/208 volt
electrical panel.
4. A general use receptacle shall be provided at all telephone equipment
terminals in-house utility rooms.
5. A dedicated isolated ground circuit shall be mounted above the ceiling
approximately 10'-0" from the front of each tenant space centered with
.respect to the front door for use by tenant.
6. General use receptacles shall be .provided on 20'-0" centerlines on
demising walls of each tenant space beginning 5'-0" from the front wall.
7. GFI receptacle shall be provided in each tenant restroom.
0
Page 12 of 26
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
SECTION 16170 -DISCONNECT SWITCHES
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SWITCHES
A. Switches shall be Square D Company or equal by General Electric, I.T.E.
Siemens-Allis, or Westinghouse, and shall have the capability to be locked in
either the "ON" or "OFF" positions.
B. All switches shall be fused or nonfused, as indicated with quick-make, quick-
break mechanism, full cover interlock, horsepower rated and enclosed in a NEMA
1 enclosure unless otherwise noted.-
C. Switches shall have rejection type fuse clips to accommodate Type R fuses only.
SECTION 16180 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 MATERIALS
A. Low voltage fuses shall be as furnished by Bussman, Cefco or approved equal by
Gould.
B. Fuse type shall be as follows unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.
C. All fuses shall be of the current limiting type.
1. 0 - 90 amps dual element, time delay Class RK-5.
2. Bussman FRN-FRS, Cefco CRN-CRS or Gould TR-R TRS-R.
3. 100 to 600 amps dual element, time delay, Class RK-1 Bussman LPN-
LPS. Cefco LON-LOS or Gould A2D-R A6D-R.
4. Above 600 amps time delay, Class L Bussman DRP-C, Cefco CLL or
Gould A4BQ, 601 to 2000 amps, and A4BY above 2000 amps.
Page 13 of 26
' PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
' SECTION 16400 - ELECTRI SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION
' 1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SYSTEM SIZING
'
A. All portions of the building and tenants electrical services and distribution shall be
sized on the basis of the following schedule as a mi nimum:
'
Item Demand/Diversity Factors
' Lighting (building) 100% of connected load
Lighting (tenant) - 100% of 3.5 watts/sq. ft.
General Use Receptacles (building)
General Use Receptacles (tenant) 100% of 180VA each
100% or 1 watt/sq. ft.
Spec. Use Receptacles 50% of connected load
Major Mechanical (+SOKW) 100% of seasonal maximum
' Miscellaneous Mechanical (-SOKW) 80% of 6 watts/sq. ft.
Miscellaneous Owner Equipment 50% of 2.5 watts/sq. ft.
' ed
h
h
di
d
i
b
if
d
i
B
All i h
d
l
i
e prec
w
n
cate
s
zes must
e ver
ie
t
t
. e
u
e.
ng sc
' C. Services shall be sized with excess 20% spare capacity in addition to spare
capacity required by National Electric Code.
' D. Minimum tenant service size shall be 200 amps.
1.02 ELECTRIC SERVICE
' A. The electrical service shall be under ound. Include rim conduit s),
~ p ~'Y (
transformer pads, secondary wiring, metering, etc., to provide 120/208V-3PH-4W
services.
B. Where only three phase 120/240 volt center-tapped delta services are available,
' the service size shall be based upon the sum of the three phase and single phase
loads.
h
i
ty at eac
C. Each service shall be sized to provide 20% usable spare electrical capac
' service.
D. Provide all required notifications to, and coordination with, the electrical utility
company. Provide all labor and material not furnished by the utility company.
' Provide allowance for labor and material for these items if information is not
available from utility company at time of bid.
Page 14 of 26
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
E. Provide breaker lock offs for all emergency circuits, I.G. outlets, and sign circuits
' in each tenant space.
F. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with the
' electrical service installation, which includes (but is not limited to) excess facility
charges, excess service charges, etc. Provide allowance for labor and material for
these items if information is not available from utility company at time of bid.
' 1.03 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION
' A. The electrical service(s) shall be located along the building rear exterior and shall
consist of a wireway serving a nominal six tenant/building services at each service
' location. The Contractor shall provide mains to service wireways as required by
applicable codes
.
' B. The wireway shall be suitable for exterior installation and shall contain full size
main and neutral conductors the full length of the wireway for tapping of
tenant/building services and metering.
' C. Branches for tenant/building services shall be fusible disconnect switches with
feed-thru or CT metering as required.
'
D. Service size and configuration shall be designed under the assumption 400 amp
branch services will be required.
E. The base building electrical system shall include a nomina1200 amp, three phase,
disconnect switch, feed-thru metering system, and 42 circuit panel for "house"
' loads.
' F. The tenant electrical services shall be 200 amp and include disconnect switches,
t
i
t
d
l
me
er
ng sys
em an
pane
s.
' G. Minimum electrical service conduit size for tenant spaces of 6500 square feet. and
larger shall be 3'/i".
' H. The distribution and short circuit protection systems shall be designed to provide
interrupting ratings at all levels of the system suitable to interrupt the available
fault current. Submittals shall include a study indicating available short circuit
' current at all panels boards or other branch circuit devices where available fault
current exceeds 10,000 amps.
' I. The distribution and short circuit protection systems shall be coordinated to
provide blackout protection. Any fault shall cause only the nearest protective
' device to open, therefore, isolating the fault.
Page 15 of 26
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
J. This is a suggested method of electrical service distribution only; alternative
designs are acceptable.
SECTION 16450 -GROUNDING
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Ground all conduits, cabinets, meters, panels, fixtures and other exposed
noncurrent carrying metal parts of electrical equipment in accordance with all
provisions of the National Electrical Code.
B. Flexible connections to motors shall be jumped with a No. 14 green equipment
grounding conductor, or per National Electrical Code Table 250-95.
C. Install a green bonding jumper between the outlet box and the receptacle
grounding terminal on all flush mounted receptacles.
D. Ground frame work and metal siding of structural steel buildings.
E. If ground wires are installed in metallic conduit, a bonding bushing shall be
installed on each end with a jumper to the ground wire.
SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Furnish and install panelboards mounted in enclosing cabinets on which shall be
mounted equipment as shown on the drawings, specified or required.
B. Panelboards shall be surface mounted dead and equipped with thermal magnetic
molded case circuit breaker units.
C. Cabinets shall be galvanized, code gauge, sheet steel complete with surface type
trim as indicated and shall be a minimum of 17" wide and 53/4" deep.
D. Provide adequate wiring and gutter space and a means for circuit identification.
Provide a glazed, typewritten circuit directory.
E. Breakers shall be common trip rated 10,000 amperes interrupting capacity.
Page 16 of 26
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
F. Panelboards shall be Square D Type NQO, or equal by I.T.E. Siemens-Allis,
General Electric or Westinghouse.
G. Panelboards shall be designed for 120/280 volts, three phase, four wire service.
'
H. Provide flush doors with lock and keys. Provide two (2) keys for each panel. All
locks shall be keyed alike.
I. Each anelboard and cabinet shall be sized for 120% of total connected load and
P
' shall contain space and bussing for 20% additional circuit breakers for future
requirements
.
J. Minimum panel capacity shall not be less than that indicated, and main capacity
shall be not less than the rating of the overcurrent protective device for the feeder.
SECTION 16482 -POWER EQUIPMENT
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
' A. All single speed starters for motors smaller than % horsepower shall be manual
starters complete with overload and pilot light, and shall be furnished and
installed by the Electrical Contractor. Starters shall be Square D Class 2510.
Starters shall be designed for 120 volt, single phase service and shall be flush
mounted in finished areas.
i B. Manual on-off switches shall be Square D 2510-KG-1 or KG-2. All starters and
fusible combination magnetic starters for motors 'h horsepower and larger shall be
' furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor and shall be magnetic motor
starters as indicated on the drawings. Starters shall be full voltage, nonreversing
single-speed, NEMA 1 enclosed with overload heaters in each line. Starters shall
' be complete with 120 volt fused and grounded control transformer and heavy duty
H-O-A selector switch mounted in the cover unless otherwise noted. Starter shall
be 208 volt, three phase service as noted on the drawings and shall be Square D
' Class 8538 or equal by General Electric, I.T.E. Siemens-Allis or Westinghouse.
C. The Contractor shall review the drawings and specifications for the plumbing,
' heating and ventilating work and shall conform to all conditions therein and shall
coordinate his work accordingly.
' D. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for checking the correct rotation for
all motors.
Page 17 of 26
' PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
E. The Electrical Contractor shall provide suitable service outlets under the direction
' of the Heating Contractor from which point the Heating Contractor shall wire and
connect his automatic control devices. Furnish and install all required safety
switches.
F. All motor overload relay heater elements shall be provided by the Contractor and
sized at 100% of motor full load current for motor name plate rating unless
1 directed otherwise by equipment supplier. The Contractor shall, after mechanical
balancing, if required, change overloads as directed.
' G. The Contractor shall furnish a chart showing motor, location of motor, and make
and size of overload used. -
' 1.02 CONTROL WIRING
A. Furnish and install all items of standard motor control which are not packaged as
apart of, or factory installed on, equipment furnished by others.
' B. All electrical control power and motor control wiring shall be done by the
Temperature Control Contractor.
' SECTION 16510 -LIGHTING
' 1.00 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Lighting design levels shall be based on average maintained foot-candle .levels
using mean lamp lumens and .9 dirt depreciation factor.
B. Exterior high intensity discharge (HID) luminaries shall be operated at 208 volts,.
C. Night lighting in the building shall be provided with normal lighting fixtures
wired on a separate breaker with breaker handle lock. Provide tenant night lights
on maximum 60'-0" centerlines in Sales Areas, and provide one night light in
Storage Area.
D. Switch tenant lighting directly from breakers in tenant panel.
1.02 LAMPS
A. Tenant Spaces: Fluorescent lamps shall be rapid-start cool white. Lamps shall be
as manufactured by General Electric, Philips or Sylvania.
Page 18 of 26
ii
r
C~
J
~~~
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
B. Common Areas: Fluorescent lamps shall be a T-8 lamp system, cool white.
Manufactured by General Electric, Philips, or Sylvania.
1.03 BALLASTS
A. Tenant Spaces: Fluorescent ballasts shall be high power factor type, NEMA Class
P with Type "A" sound rating, and so certified by Underwriters' Laboratories.
B. Common Areas: Fluorescent T-8 lamp system shall be electronic ballasts, and so
certified by Underwriters' Laboratories.
C. High pressure sodium, multi-vapor,-etc., shall be high power factor type.
D. All ballasts shall have a temperature rating suitable for the intended use. Exterior
ratings shall be assumed to be - 20 degrees F.
E. Ballasts shall conform to the applicable E.T.L. and Underwriters' Laboratories
specifications.
1.04 EXIT AND EMERGENCY EGRESS LIGHTING
A. Provide emergency exit and egress lighting as required by code and the local
building inspection authorities.
B. Exit and emergency lighting shall be battery powered type with integral 11/z hour
battery units. Battery units shall contain solid state chargers, test lights and
switches.
1.05 EXTERIOR
A. Parking Lot and Roadway Lighting
1. Lighting Levels:
a. The site lighting design shall produce a minimum of 1.0 foot-
candles at the perimeter and in the interior lot. The average light
level in the lot shall be not less than 2foot-candles with a
minimum of 2.0 foot-candles at pedestrian walks and main
vehicular drives. The foot-candle levels indicated above are
average maintained values; the site lighting design shall
incorporate appropriate lamp lumen and dirt depreciation factors.
In general, poles shall be located parallel and/or perpendicular with
respect to each other; skewed configuration shall not be acceptable.
Page 19 of 26
n
~',
0
n
u
2
3.
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
The average to minimum ratio for the lot shall not exceed 4:1. The
maximum to minimum ratio for the lot shall not exceed 15:1.
Poles:
a. All poles shall be square, one-piece steel with bronze finish unless
specifically noted otherwise. Furnish base covers for all poles.
The pole and base shall be designed to withstand 100 MPH wind
loads with a gust factor of 1.3 on the pole, base and luminaries.
b. All poles whose fundamental neutral frequency lies in the range of
3 to 6 CPS shall be provided with center tube vibration dampeners.
Poles shall be designed such that the second harmonic of the
natural frequency as-indueed by the Karman vortices shall occur at
a wind velocity of not more than 7 MPH. Poles shall be provided
with a center span cable support which will fix the branch circuit
wires at the center of the pole diameter.
Luminaries:
a. The luminaire/lamp combination shall provide a light distribution
meeting the requirements for an IES cutoff classification.
b. The total downward coefficient of utilization for the luminaire
shall be not less than 70%.
c. The total contribution of light above 75 degree vertical angle shall
not exceed 1% of rated lamp lumens on the street side and 0.5% on
the "house" side.
d. The total downward coefficient of utilization for the luminaire
shall be no less than 70%.
e. The total contribution of light above 75° vertical angle shall not
exceed 1% of rated lamp lumens on the street side and 0.5% on the
"house" side.
f. The maximum candlepower at a vertical angle of 80° and above in
any plane shall not be greater than 27 candela per 1000 rated lamp
lumens. Nadir candlepower shall not exceed 134 candela per 1000
rated lumens.
g. An acceptable luminaire shall meet the above foot-candle
requirements without hot spots, dark spots or striations.
Page 20 of 26
n
n
C
J
i_
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
h. The luminaire shall have a bronze finish to match the pole and
shall utilize a metal halide lamp with a 208 volt ballast.
4. Submittal:
a. Submit a computer generated printout (photometric plan) of the
site indicating proposed pole locations, maintained average foot-
candle levels and maximum to minimum and average to minimum
ratios. Include in the submittal a catalog data. sheet on the
proposed luminaire and pole.
5. Bases:
a. Top of concrete bases shall be 27" above grade.
6. Wall mounted fixtures may be utilized on the rear of the building. The
fixtures may be 250 watt metal halide wall packs, Lithonia "TWH" Series
or approved equal where cutoff type fixtures are not required by local
codes and/or property restrictions.
7. On properties with flagpoles provide Hubbell SLS-1000H-138 metal
halide floodlight to illuminate the site flag.
8. Provide wiring to the internally illuminated site signs.
9. Provide recessed canopy lighting in canopy along storefront unless shown
otherwise on Architectural Drawings. The fixtures shall be 8" diameter
recessed 100w metal halide open (no shatter shield), downlights with clear
one-piece Alzak reflectors; Halo M7800-740-448000-TRM8-P Series or
approved equal. Lamps shall be coated and suitable for use in open
downlights, Sylvania MP 100/C/U/Med or approved equal. Fixtures shall
be equally spaced between canopy supports with a maximum of 12'-0"
between fixtures.
10. On properties with pylon signs provide power to pylon sign location.
1.06 INTERIOR
A. Lighting Levels:
Area
Foot-Candles
Fixture Type
Corridors and Storage
25 2 x 4 lay-in, 0.110
Acrylic Lens or
4'-0"Bare Strip.
Page 21 of 26
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
Food Court 50 2 x 4 lay-in, 0.110
If Applicable. Acrylic Lens.
Tenant Spaces 1 Fixture per 100 s.f. 2 x 4 lay-in, 0.110
~l Fixture Acyclic Lens.
Public Restrooms See Ceiling Plan 2 x 4 lay-in, 0.110
Acrylic Lens.
B. Fixtures:
1. 2 x 41ay-in troffers shall be Lithonia "GT" Series or approved equal.
2. 4'-0" or 8'-0" bare strips shall be~Lithonia "C" Series or approved equal.
3. Tenant Toilet Rooms shall have a bath fanlight fixture, similar to Broan,
Model #657.
4. Exit lights, emergency lights and combination exit/emergency lights shall
be Lithonia "Quantum" Series or approved equal.
1.07 LIGHTING CONTROLS
A. Except as follows, lighting switches shall be provided for all interior lighting
systems on an individual area basis.
1. Exit, emergency egress and tenant interior night lighting shall operate
continuously, without the means of control.
2. Tenant space lighting shall be controlled via the branch circuit breakers
located in the tenant electrical panel.
3. Tenant signage shall be connected to the tenant panel and controlled via
the building powerline carrier control system.
B. All exterior lighting, including site signage and flagpole lighting, shall be
controlled via the project powerline carrier control system on an individual fixture
basis. The system shall include photocell activation. Provide night lighting near
tenant doors and along driveways.
C. Provide exterior lighting control zones as follows:
1. Parking lot general lighting.
2. Driveway and parking lot night lighting.
3. Canopy lighting.
4. Security lighting.
Page 22 of 26
1
~~
CI~~
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
5. Tenant signage.
6. Pylon signage.
7. Common area signage.
8. Flagpole lighting.
9. Exterior neon lighting. If applicable.
10. Spare.
11. Spare.
D. Coordinate all system controls with the Owner and the system supplier.
SECTION 16600 -LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
1.00 GENERAL
~ ~ o,
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Contract shall provide, and install complete, a "panelmax" micro-computer-based
low voltage switching system. System shall consist of low voltage relay panels,
hand held controllers, photocells, occupancy sensors and power supplies.
B. All equipment shall be U.L. listed and approved for the intended use and voltage
listed. System shall be manufactured by L- ithonia control systems or approved
equal.
C. The panelmax low voltage lighting control system shall include, but not be
limited to the following:
1. Low voltage relay panels shall each contain the number of load relays as
scheduled on the plans. In addition, each relay panel shall also include all
power supplies, logic circuits and wiring terminals, factory assembled and
tested for operation as described below. Each panel shall be housed in a
single NEMA I wall mounted steel enclosure. In addition to low voltage
wiring area, two line voltage wiring comparhnents shall be provided.
Each relay shall have a single set of contacts rated for 20 amps at 120 or
277 volts. LED indicators shall be included within panel to display status
of each relay (on or off). Each relay panel shall include as many
programmable low voltage switch definitions shall be protected from loss
of power for periods up to ten (10) years. Relay panel shall be provided
with a low voltage receptacle Type RJ 11 for connection of a separate
Hand Held Controller for schedule and switch definition. One hand held
controller is required for operation of all low voltage relay panels. Hand
held controller shall have an environmentally sealed keypad, 6' control
line for connection to relay panel, and a four line, 20 character per line,
LCD display window which clearly details user instruction.
Page 23 of 26
u
u
r
1
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
2. LCPI HHC -Hand Held Controller
LPC -Photo Cell
LUS1000 -Occupancy Sensor
LUS700 -Automatic On/Off Control
LUS6600 -Low Voltage Switch
LVPS -Power Supply
SECTION 16740 -TELEPHONE SYSTEM
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide all conduits, outlets, etc., in accordance with the Contract Documents, as
required by code or by Owner's telephone company.
1.02 SERVICE ENTRANCE
A. Provide a nominal 3" conduit from the exterior building .property line to a main
telephone equipment terminal in each project electrical room (except where
provided by the telephone company). The size, number and locations of conduits
shall be as required by the telephone company.
B. Contractor may, with the permission of the telephone company, provide conduit
stub out of the building with trenching to the property line. Coordinate with the
telephone company to provide conduits under any on-site pavement, sidewalks,
etc.
C. The Contractor shall include all service charges from the utility company.
Provide allowance for this item if information from utility company is not
available at time of bid.
1.03 TERMINALS
A. .Provide power requirements and grounding for telephone terminals as required by
the telephone company.
B. Provide raceways between telephone terminal locations.
C. Provide nominal 4' x 8' 3/a" plywood backboard for the base building main
terminal location(s).
D. Provide nominal 2' x 2'-3/a" plywood backboard within each tenant space.
Page 24 of 26
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
1.04 CABLING
A. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install one six (6) pair #24 gauge
plenum-rated cable to each tenant space from the building telephone service
entrance location. The cable shall be terminated near the tenant electrical panel.
It shall be the Contractor's option to provide standard cable in 3/a" conduit in lieu
of plenum-rated cable.
SECTION 16900 -MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide wiring for trash compactors based upon one compactor per 40,000 square
feet of space.
B. Provide one weatherproof GFI receptacle near the base of the pylon sign.
C. Alternate: Provide electric heat trace in gutters and downspouts at the front of the
building.
D. Provide wiring for miscellaneous equipment indicated on site plan such as
aerators, dosing tanks, etc.
E. Provide one 3" spare conduit between all utility rooms within a building, between
buildings, and stubbed out beyond paving to any proposed building(s).
1.02 TENANT SPACE
A. Provide wiring for an electric water heater in storage area. ,
B. Provide a minimum of three (3) exit lights per space.
C. Provide a dedicated sign circuit via lighting control system.
D. Provide 2 circuits for tenant signage. Sign location per signage layout plan. J
Box to run to storefront wall. Mount J Box on inside face of sign band.
1.03 LANDLORD/COMMON AREAS
A. Provide wiring for electric hand dryers in public restrooms. (2 per restroom).
Page 25 of 26
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL CRITERIA
B. Install an electric unit heater in all utility rooms. Unit furnished by Mechanical
Contractor.
C. Provide outlets for electrical water coolers.
D. Provide connections for all front exterior neon lighting if applicable. To be
controlled by lighting control system.
END OF DIVISION 16000
Page 26 of 26
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
I
I
WEATHER T1GH7 '
WAU_ TERMINATION-~
I
MAKE CONNECTION TO ---<
COMBINATION FAN/UGNT
FlXTURE - FlXTURE BY
ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR
I~
li
AND LOCATION AS REO'D BBY AIR TITY
SYSTEM ',~
NOTE:
EXACT DUCT AND DIFFUSER YOUT
TO BE DETERMINED BY SPAC
REQUIREMENTS AND LIGHTING ~ LAN
1 HOUR TF1:At•IT
D-1dISING `h'ALL
FULL HEIGHT TO
ROOF DECK
4-WAY SUPPLY AlR DI
COORDINATE LOCATION
LIGHTING LAYOUT --
~M -
SUPPLY AIR DUCT TO S70CK AREA -
SIZE DUCT FOR 20R OF 70TAL• AIR FLOW
(TYPICAL) i .
~T 1. - n~
} lyV~ 1\~I VI~1
~ 1•
i FIRE DAMPER (ONLY AS REO'D)
~ ~ ~ ~' ~~ 'lint 1 t C~;Ai~ it
i ' ~' EY ;~JIA?IT
1 ~ VOLUME . ' '
t pAMpER ;! RETURN AIR SOUND TRAP - (1)
~ i FULL SIZED TEE AND (2) 4'- 0'
_ ' 'I LONG SECTIONS OF STRAIGHT DUCT
i ~ SIZE STRAIGHT DUCT FOR MAXIMUM
;~ 1000 FPM VELOCITY (FREE AREA)
11
S tl
I`` it
t
.e
. I SIZE MAIN '
~-SUPPLY PIR DUCT SYSTEM -
ANO BRANCH DUCTS FOR 0.1~ SP LOSS/
100 ~EE.7 -MAXIMUM VELOCITY 1750 FPM
(FREE iEA)
'~ ~ l~
F1FXlBLE~ DUCTWORK TAKE-OFF WITH SPIN-lN ,
FlTTING FOR VOLUME CONTROL . .
I I
-~ I ~I
2-WAY SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER AT YANDOWS
i
t~
1 i•
1 .I
- ~-.
".-- i
._.w--- ~~ r" 1
i ~1 ~Cer~A!x A,•~ I
. t C~IGPY An~-~
~ .
i i '
r --
_ - -.. ,. .. r -rirl.l A AIT ca er_F - HVAC
?~-S
PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
DESCRIPTION YAABO CW HW TRAP VENT
WATER CLOSET -FLOOR SET -
TANK TYPE -HANDICAP WC_~ ~/2" ___ 4" 2"
wATER CLOSET -FLOOR SET -
TANK TYPE wC-2 1 /2" --- 4" 2"
LAVATORY -WALL HUNG -
HANDICAP L_~ ~/2" ~/2" ~_~/2" t-1/2"
LAVATORY -WALL HUNG L-2 1/2" 1/2" 1-1/2" 1-1/2"
PLUMBING LEGEND
..--- - COLD WATER PIPE
- - HOT WATER PIPE
SANITARY BELOW FLOOR
------SAN SANITARY ABOVE FLOOR
_ _ _ _ _ V _ _ _ - - - SANITARY VENT PIPE
VTR ~ VENT THRU ROOF
i~.r- BALL VALVE
-«i-- FREEZE-PROOF WALL HYDRANT
C PIPE DROP
PIPE TEE
C PIPE CAP
O-- PIPE RISE
-: FLOW DIRECTION
+~ --~1 O- CLEANOUT
NG NATURAL GAS PIPE
PLUMBING CONTRACTOR
CW ,
HW
SAN
SAN
V
VTR
FwH
CO
NG
P.C.
P-3
W
CL J
IO- > ~
w w p 4 p .~
~ QtON W WIJi
=0 TWO
i ~~O Ocl1N
', U~~ UWJ
_ ~ Y ~
Q
I J.ON~? Q¢a.~
W J r .-
I l
Q'
{ R.
1
J
1
i'
'r;
11i
°~,
~!
I3• •.. ~~
t,.
1~
_:_ • ~-- '
:~~
,'
a ~
1 '
j Z
Z
I ~ a ~ n..
i
~ Q~ 3~
' ' o 0
i-
F-z °z
=U UU
~N
1 ~~ +~
1
R
Y
Z
N
Z ~
Q O
~ O
0 J
W
W O
N ~
J ~
J W
~_
t=i ~..
• •
. lJ...
W
'
Q
. W
Z
W
J
1 ^ ~
~ Jz U
~ `~' m ~ C~
v Z Q
Z ~
>
4 Z
~ ~
oZw W
J
> U 40~
O - W
J ~ Q ~ Q --~
m J ~~ W
( W ~ Q
U J
Q
W
o v=ia d. ~
mo
I
- z
~•4
1
1 ~ ..
' GAS PIPE SIZE -
SEE FLOOR PLAN.
GAS COCK
UNION
~~ ~ ~ ~ EQUIPMENT
I
• U _
--
' ~ 6" LONG
FUIl SIZE
• GIRT LEG -CAPPED
' TYPICAL GAS CONNECTION DETAIL
NO SCALE ~~
•
GALVANIZED PIPE CLAMP
• 0 SUPPORT w
ANCHOR T ~
S
' GALVANIZED SCREW
K To eE
wooD BLOC
PLACED ON SAME
MATERIAL OF ROOF
<~ '
GAS LINE
,TED w00D BLOCK
ROOF
TYPICAL ROOF PIPE SUPPORT DETAIL
' NO SCALE
P-5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
i - 6 PR. PIENUM RATED
TELEPNONE CABLE TO
~IGl/i1NQ
"~ ~ ~ C°'"Q°*x°°~A
~tj' YA7I-~
~ipR SIGN
(OEOIGTfD dRCUIT)
TELEPHONE TERYINA~
a II N~
A A A
N~ ~ II
TO 200 II
AT
A A A A
STOCK R T'- -- 0 ~
BY TENANT t U -
I FIRE C
NL
A A A A
A A A A ,
` ,500 5 ~ .
A A A A
A A A A
a '
A A A A
A A A A
Hl
A A A A
DEDI ATEO OLA TE
I J ~ FOR 11CNTINC
• SPACE AND S
SECDON t6S1
A A A A
I I i
'MOUSE' CANOPY 1
REV, 9-95 TYPICAL 3.500 S.F. TENANT SPACE
H. T,S,
(rmERf REQUIRED)
ORRIDOR LIGHTING
N.T.S.
CRITERIA FOR T~NANi
TOOK ROOYS,' SEE
0 UCH IING. 1.06 INTERIOR
~'
1
1
t - 6 PR, P~ENUN RATED
III
II
II
(WHERE RfOUIREO)
CORRIDOR LIGHTING
N.T,S,
i
Ul.n ~~n4 O ~O, O O
a O~ 0 ~C~7 ncEn.~ a
fCR SIGN
(DEDICATED CIRCUIT)
REY, 9-93 TYPICAL 5.500 S.F. TENANT SPAC
N. T,S,
M TINC CRITERIA iCR TENANT
SPACC ANO STCCK RCOMS, SCC
SEC hON 16510 UCH tINC, LC6 IN ifRICR
I~